JP2023014182A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 holds an additional lottery of an AT mode for reporting operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 according to an AT random number and a lottery result of a game. Notification corresponding to an AT random number for allowing an additional lottery of an AT mode to be won easily and notification corresponding to an AT random number for preventing an additional lottery of an AT mode from being won easily may be performed, and a player can select whether the additional lottery of an AT mode is executed or avoided based on the notification. When a specific condition is satisfied, notification corresponding to an AT random number for allowing an additional lottery to be won easily may be performed even for the AT random number for preventing an additional lottery of an AT mode from being won easily.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a means capable of updating predetermined information;
a means capable of executing a specific determination that enables the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player, using at least the specific information corresponding to the predetermined information;
means capable of executing specific notification of the specific information used for the specific determination;
with
A first game that allows the specific determination to be performed and a second game that allows the specific determination not to be performed are executable,
The specific determination corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event when using the first specific information of the specific information than when using the second specific information of the specific information. The identification result is likely to be obtained, or the identification result is obtained when the first identification information is used, but the identification result is not obtained when the second identification information is used,
means capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information as the specific notification;
means capable of executing a second specific notification corresponding to the second specific information as the specific notification;
means capable of executing the first specific notification as the specific notification in a predetermined case even if the specific information used for the specific determination is the second specific information;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows lottery opportunity judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery mode information. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flow chart which shows processing for lottery opportunity information. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special information. It is a figure which shows an example of a special information lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect and a reel effect by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the lottery mode transition. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting 1st process for BB. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting 2nd process for BB. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the lottery mode transition. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the lottery mode transition. 10(a) is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition game processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing table notification processing in modification 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. In Modified Example 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given, (b) is a diagram showing a part of the BB state lottery table, and (c1) is a lottery result. It is a flow chart which shows a part of correspondence processing, and (c2) is a flow chart which shows a part of winning result correspondence processing. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; (a) is a flowchart showing an opportunity adjustment process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a part of an AT lottery mode notification process. 12(a) is a flowchart showing advantageous interval transition game processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing lottery opportunity determination processing in Modified Example 3. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a special information lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery mode information. 9 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the information storage area for lottery. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. (a) is a flowchart showing an advantageous section transition game process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lottery opportunity determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending|holding display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a hold display; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a hold display; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a hold display; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing AT lottery mode notification processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification restriction processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for lottery opportunity information. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special information. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a second mode notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a predictive notification lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between lottery mode and AT counter. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between lottery mode and AT counter. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in modification 1; In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the relationship between the transition to the lottery mode in various situations and whether or not various random number processing is executed. It is a diagram. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing, (b) is a flowchart showing random number shift processing, and (c) is for explaining the outline of the lottery information storage area. is a diagram. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 1st AT. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 2nd AT. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. 10 is a flow chart showing specialized zone count processing. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for a first specialized zone; 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a second specialized zone; It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 1st specialization zones. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 2nd special zones. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 8 is a flow chart showing first processing for specialization; It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second processing for specialization; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification type table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of a first specialized zone and a second specialized zone. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the first specialized zone; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the second specialized zone; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference in the number of medals won due to the difference in game modes in the first specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference in the number of medals won due to the difference in game modes in the first specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 10 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process at the time of all stop in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an excess information lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an excess notification lottery table in modification 2; 14 is a flow chart showing an all-stop effect setting process in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing second processing for specialization in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo-notification lottery table. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table for the first specialized zone in modification 5; 19 is a flow chart showing processing for the first specialized zone in modification 6. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 1st specialization zones. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing processing for the first specialized zone in modification 7; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing specialized zone count processing. 8 is a flow chart showing first processing for specialization; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a first specialized zone; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing specialized zone count processing in Modification 8. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for a first specialized zone; 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a second specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing avoidance count handling processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit;

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second replay win is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be provided.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the “Bell” symbol, the “Ark shell” symbol or the “Senior” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when it stops at the top. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown in the figure, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. When the third replay win is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be provided.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process for subtracting/adding the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the game state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is displayed. to select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state. Select a lottery table. When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is executed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set in the following step S304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating that the first BB has been won or a winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating that the second BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, when the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the setting value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is 0. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the bell 1 in the pressing order is won (won at IV=11), and the 1st minor win flag, 9th minor win win flag, 10th minor win win flag and 13th minor win win flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply is won, and the 2nd BB is won and the first replay is made. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won on the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Therefore, in the case where the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the upper stage cannot be stopped, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. If a 2nd minor win, 3rd minor win, 4th minor win, 5th minor win, or 6th minor win win is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins may be established, or none of the minor wins may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor win is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so as to let the display control device 81 recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "90" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to is performed. Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins of the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "90" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described later in detail.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, since a lottery table is used in which the number of medals can be reduced in each game, even if the 1BB state or the 2BB state is completed, the number of medals held will not increase. Conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will be reduced by completing the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the first BB end command and the second BB end command are received will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, winning of the 2nd BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in the 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. In addition, the first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. Also, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a winning combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another winning combination when the winning combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 25) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step S604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like may occur and a normal section in which the push order notification may not occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different odds of winning additional prizes are set as the AT mode. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp , and is set when shifting to the AT mode. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, thereby grasping the lottery mode of the shift lottery to the AT mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the first mode and the second mode are set as the lottery modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the second mode is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the first mode. It is designed to make it easier to win. The first mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode.

If the first mode flag is set at step S802, then at step S803, a process of acquiring the second mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the first mode flag is not set in step S802, a process of acquiring the first mode transition lottery table is executed in step S804. The second mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery for determining whether to transition from the first mode to the second mode. It is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to AT lottery mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, the second mode transition lottery table and the first mode transition lottery table are, as shown in FIG. Winning probability of transfer lottery) is set. As shown in FIG. 30, as triggers for the lottery for transition from the first mode to the second mode, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, and watermelon are set. In the lottery for transition to the second mode, basically, specific roles called so-called rare roles such as Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon are selected. It is set to make it easier to win in the transition lottery as a trigger. For example, in the transition lottery triggered by normal Lip A to Normal Lip C, the probability of winning is 1%, while in the transition lottery triggered by Cherry A, it is set to be won with a probability of 10%. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, as trigger hands for the transition lottery from the second mode to the first mode, normal reps A, normal reps B, and normal reps C are set, and the special hand is No. It is not set as a trigger for a lottery to switch to mode 1.

After acquiring each mode transition lottery table in step S803 or step S804, AT lottery mode transition lottery processing is executed in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the player wins the AT lottery mode transition lottery. If the prize is won, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag is set in step S807.

If the first mode flag is set and the lottery for transition from the first mode to the second mode is won, in step S808, the process of clearing the first mode flag is executed. As a result, the lottery mode of the AT mode shift lottery shifts from the first mode to the second mode. Then, in step S809, processing for setting a second mode transition command is executed. The second mode transition command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the second mode transition command will be described later in detail.

If the first mode flag is not set in step S807 and the lottery for transition from the second mode to the first mode is won, in step S810, a process for setting the first mode flag is executed. As a result, the lottery mode of the AT mode shift lottery shifts from the second mode to the first mode. Then, in step S811, processing for setting a first mode shift command is executed. The first mode shift command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the lottery mode of the AT mode shift lottery has shifted from the second mode to the first mode. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the first mode shift command will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, or if the process of step S809 or step S811 is executed, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not a lottery trigger flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The lottery trigger flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that a specific trigger for executing a lottery for shifting to the AT mode has occurred. In the present embodiment, the above specific opportunity is generated when a predetermined number of games have been executed after the shift to the advantageous section occurs. A lottery opportunity flag is set when the game is executed.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S812, then in step S813, a process of acquiring a non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. If the lottery trigger flag is set, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag is set in step S814, and if the first mode flag is set, various table A process of acquiring the first AT mode transition lottery table from the storage area 105a is executed. If the first mode flag is not set, in step S816, a process of acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the non-opportunistic AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. On the other hand, in the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set regardless of the game lottery result. More specifically, in the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table, the above specific role is set as the trigger role for the AT mode transition lottery. , the AT mode transition lottery is not executed. In the first AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 10% regardless of the game lottery result, and in the second AT mode transition lottery table, 60% regardless of the game lottery result. % probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode transition lottery is more likely to be won in the case of using the second AT mode transition lottery table than in the case of using the first AT mode transition lottery table. It is designed to make it easier.

In more detail about each AT mode transition lottery table, in the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table, as described above, the AT mode transition lottery is executed with the specific role as a trigger, while the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table In the mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed regardless of the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the table is the least likely to be won and the second AT mode shift lottery table is the most likely to be won. However, for example, if the lottery result of the game is Cherry C, although the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table wins with a probability of 100%, the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table are used. The table is set in such a way that there are cases where winning is not possible, and depending on the result of the game lottery, there are cases where it is easier to win using the non-trigger AT mode shift lottery table.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S813, step S815, or step S816, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S817. Then, in step S818, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, then in step S819 a process for setting an AT mode winning flag is executed. After executing the process of step S819, after executing the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S820, the AT lottery process ends.

If it is determined in step S818 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S821. In step S821, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the current AT mode shift lottery was a lottery based on a specific trigger. If it is an AT mode shift lottery based on a specific opportunity, the process of clearing the lottery opportunity flag is executed in step S822, and the process of setting the opportunity non-winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S823. The opportunity non-win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity was not won. After that, in step S824, after executing the process of setting the opportunity non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, the AT lottery process is ended. The opportunity non-winning command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity was not won. The processing on the side will be described later in detail. If it is determined in step S821 that the lottery for transition to AT mode is not based on a specific opportunity, the process for AT lottery ends as it is.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when any AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set with different additional winning odds, and the second AT mode is set to have a higher winning odds than the first AT mode. there is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, in the additional lottery table, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. is set so that in the first AT mode, the player wins the additional lottery with a probability of 5%, while in the second AT mode, the player wins the additional lottery with a probability of 10%.

In step S903, an additional lottery is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, the number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed in step S905. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S905, in step S906, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the AT game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step S906, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S907, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

<Rotation effect setting process>
In this embodiment, which AT mode to shift to is determined after the AT mode winning flag is set and before shifting to the AT mode. More specifically, it is configured to be determined by the rotation effect processing at the start of reel rotation of the game in which the AT mode shift lottery is won. The rotation effect process is a process executed at step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 22), and is executed after the lottery process (FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S1001, the lottery trigger flag or the trigger non-winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is performed in the game. When none of the flags is set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. If any flag is set, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the lottery trigger flag is set, and if it is set, the lottery trigger flag is cleared in step S1003. Then, in step S1004, AT type determination processing is executed. In the AT type determination process, for example, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery according to the setting value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased during the advantageous interval, the number of games during the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly. . In subsequent step S1005, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S1004 is the first AT mode. When the AT mode of this time is determined as the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT mode flag is executed in step S1006, and in the subsequent step S1007, the first AT notification rotation effect is executed as the current rotation effect. After the setting is made so as to do so, the rotation effect processing is terminated.

As the rotation effect for notifying the first AT, for example, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating as shown in FIG. As the symbol combination for the first AT, the symbol "White 7" is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. A production that restarts the rotation is set. Note that the first AT notification rotation effect is a effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started.

In step S1005, when the AT mode of this time is determined as the second AT mode, in step S1008 the process of setting the second AT mode flag is executed, and in the subsequent step S1009 the second AT is notified as the rotation effect of this time. After setting so as to execute the rotation effect for use, the rotation effect processing is terminated.

As the rotation effect for informing the second AT, for example, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating as shown in FIG. As the symbol combination for the second AT, the "BAR" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. is set to resume. Note that the second AT notification rotation effect is a effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S1002 and the AT mode transition lottery based on the current specific trigger is not won, in step S1010, the rotation effect for notification of loss is executed as the rotation effect of this time. , and then the rotation effect processing is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 47(b1), after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the first AT symbol combination in FIG. 47(b2) and FIG. Without suspending any of the symbol combinations for the second AT in (b3), for example, after suspending the separation on a predetermined line (middle line L2), as shown in FIG. 47(b4) , the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to restart their rotation. It should be noted that the loss notification rotation effect is an effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the game is informed that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the corresponding AT mode flag is set, and a transition to the AT mode occurs. It will be. When the shift to the AT mode occurs, it becomes possible to notify the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the bell is won in the pressing order.

Then, at the start of the game as a rotating effect, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are notified that the symbol combination for the first AT will be temporarily stopped to cause a shift to the first AT mode, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be notified. It is notified that the pattern combination for the second AT is temporarily stopped, and that the transition to the second AT mode will occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(a), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to display characters such as "AT confirmed" to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Note that the notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be changed according to the type of AT mode to be shifted, or may be a common notification mode regardless of the type of AT mode to be shifted.

Notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processing of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery process and the AT addition process are executed in the process of step S607 or step S608, the process of notifying the pressing order is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S609 to S612, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S611, an instruction is given to perform push order notification corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Control monitor 68; Then, in step S612, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

If it is determined in step S609 that the bell has not been won in the pressing order, or if none of the AT mode flags have been set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1103. That is, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the AT mode winning flag is set means that the AT mode winning flag is set at the start of the current game. In this case, after executing the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag in step S1105, in step S1106, the process of inputting "50" to the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played during the AT mode. That is, the first AT mode and the second AT mode have different winning percentages, but have the same initial number of games set at the time of transition.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1104, or after the process of step S1106 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether or not any AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode has ended. After that, in step S1112, after executing the process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is ended. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT end command will be described later in detail. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1107 or if the AT game counter is not 0 in step S1109, the winning result handling process is terminated.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1204. Then, in step S1205, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1206, a process of starting counting the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, counting the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1207, an advantageous section transition game process is executed. In the advantageous interval transition game processing, the number of AT mode ceiling games is set, for example, as the setting of the advantageous interval to be transitioned to this time.

After executing the advantageous section transition game processing in step S1207, or when it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set in step S1202, it is determined in step S1203 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set. If so, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether or not any of the AT mode flags is set and the conditions for starting the display of the section indicator are met. If any AT mode flag is set, in step S1209, the display of the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1210 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1210, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1208 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1209 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1211 or step S1212, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1213. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1214, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1213 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1214, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1213 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1214, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1213. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1302, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1302, in step S1303, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1303, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1304, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1305. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In subsequent step S1306, a process of setting the advantageous section game command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The advantageous section game command includes the contents of the processing results of steps S1302 to S1305. That is, the advantageous interval game command includes information on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, information on the MY counter, and information on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the advantageous section game command will be described later in detail.

In subsequent step S1307, lottery opportunity determination processing is executed. The lottery opportunity determination process is a process for determining whether or not a specific opportunity for executing the AT mode transition lottery has occurred.

<Lottery opportunity determination processing>
In the lottery opportunity determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S1401, a process of determining whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is a predetermined number is executed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 50. If the number is not 50, the lottery opportunity determination process is terminated. If the number is 50, the process advances to step S1402 to execute processing for setting a lottery trigger flag. By executing such processing, the AT mode shift lottery based on the lottery trigger flag is executed in the lottery result correspondence processing of the next game.

In subsequent step S1403, a process of setting the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the lottery trigger command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1403, the lottery opportunity determination process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the section display second process, after the lottery trigger determination process is executed in step S1307, in step S1308, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or It is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY has reached 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1309. In the subsequent step S1310, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1311, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated.

More specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1311, more specifically, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section is returned to the initial value. For example, if an advantageous section flag, an AT mode winning flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous sections MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1308 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1312, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1309 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the opportunity non-election flag is set. If the opportunity non-winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1309 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section.

That is, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode is performed, and if the shift lottery is won, the vehicle shifts to the AT mode. When the AT mode ends, the advantageous section ends together with the end of the AT mode. Further, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches 50, an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity, and the advantageous section ends even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

On the other hand, if neither the AT mode end flag nor the opportunity non-winning flag is set, the section display second process is ended as it is without ending the advantageous section.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, and the mode transition lottery of the AT mode transition lottery are performed by placing a specific prescribed number of bets set according to the gaming state. It is executed in the game, and is not executed in the game in which bets other than the specified prescribed number are made. More specifically, in the state before transition to the first BB state or the second BB state, such as the non-internal state or the internal state, both the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game can be executed, but the specific prescribed number is 3. Since it is set, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the processing related to the instruction function is executed in the 3-bet game, but the processing related to the instruction function is not executed in the 2-bet game. On the other hand, in the first BB state and the second BB state, only the 3-bet game can be executed, but since the specific prescribed number is set to 2, the instruction function is not related to the first BB state and the second BB state. No action is taken. In other words, the processing related to the command function is executed in the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or internal state, but the processing related to the command function is not executed in the 2-bet game or each BB state in the non-internal state or internal state.

On the other hand, the specific trigger that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is defined by the number of advantageous interval games AG counted regardless of the number of bets and the state as described above, and the number of advantageous interval games AG is 50. Thus, the lottery opportunity flag is set. More specifically, the number of advantageous interval games AG is counted not only by the number of 3-bet games in non-internal and internal states, but also by the number of 2-bet games in non-internal and internal states and the number of games in each BB state. be.

Then, for example, by playing a 2-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, it is possible to set the lottery opportunity flag, although the processing related to the instruction function is not performed. AT mode shift lottery based on the lottery trigger flag is executed in the game with the first specific prescribed number after is set. That is, in the game in which the 2-bet game is switched to the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed.

More specifically, as part of the processing related to the instruction function, the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery occurs in a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or internal state, but not in a 2-bet game or in a non-internal state or internal state. In each BB state, the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery does not occur. On the other hand, the specific opportunity occurs 50 games after the transition to the advantageous section regardless of the gaming state or the number of bets. Therefore, for example, by playing a non-internal state or an internal state in a 3-bet game, the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed, and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is shifted from the first mode to the second mode. After succeeding in the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, it is possible to avoid executing the AT lottery mode transition lottery process again by proceeding with the game in the 2-bet game until a specific opportunity occurs. Then, it is possible to generate a specific opportunity while staying in the second mode, and then by switching to the 3-bet game, an AT mode transition lottery using the second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side is performed. It is possible to realize a game such as receiving.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to realize the above novel game utilizing the relationship between the execution/non-execution of processing related to the instruction function defined by the specific prescribed number and the specific trigger that occurs regardless of the specific prescribed number. and Below, a description will be given of the production process for realizing the game described above.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1502. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 has been executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, in step S1504, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, or if the process of step S1504 has been executed, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are a first mode transition command, a second mode transition command, an AT winning notification command, a chance non-winning command, an add-on command, a push order notification command, and the like, which are set in the processing (FIG. 27). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1506.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, or if the process of step S1506 has been executed, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1508, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 has been executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, and There are a second BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, a lottery trigger command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, in step S1510, all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1511, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1511, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1511, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1506 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S1603, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of a specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, there are cases where the AT mode shift lottery is performed with these lottery results as a trigger even if no specific opportunity has occurred, and as shown in FIG. In the additional lottery mode, it is set so that the additional lottery is more likely to be won than the result of the lottery other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the game this time is a winning of a special combination, a special combination notification process is executed in step S1605. In the specific winning notification processing, settings are made so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the lottery result of the current game is one of the specific winning combinations. For example, as shown in FIG. 48(b), three characters of exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in association with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided as the special combination notification. A production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after the processing of step S1603 or step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not an add command has been received. When the add-on command is received, setting processing of add-on effect is executed in step S1607. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may include a so-called additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

When a negative determination is made in step S1606, or after executing the processing of step S1607, AT lottery mode notification processing is executed in step S1608. As already explained, in the present embodiment, as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, the first mode in which it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery and the second mode in which it is easier to win than the first mode are set. In the present embodiment, a special notification may be executed to indicate whether the user is staying in the first mode or the second mode. is the processing of

<AT lottery mode notification processing>
In the AT lottery mode notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the first mode transition command has been received as the current start command. If the first mode shift command has been received, then in step S1702 processing is executed to set the first flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The first flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the AT lottery mode is the first mode on the low probability side.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or if the process of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not a second mode transition command has been received as the current start command. If the second mode shift command has been received, then in step S1704, processing for clearing the first flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not a chance non-winning command has been received as a command at the start of this time. As already explained, the opportunity non-win command is a command output from the main controller 101 side when the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won. When the opportunity non-winning command is received, in step S1706, the process of adding 1 to the opportunity through counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The opportunity through counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive times that the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity has not been won. The processing for executing the special notification will be described in detail later, but in the present embodiment, the special notification in the second mode can be executed according to the value of the trigger through counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not an AT win notification command has been received as a command at the start of this time. When the AT winning notification command is received, after executing the process of clearing the above-mentioned opportunity through counter to 0 in step S1708, this AT lottery mode notification process is terminated. Moreover, when the AT winning notification command is not received in step S1707, the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process at the start, after executing the AT lottery mode notification process at step S1608, at step S1609, as the command at the start of this time, AT winning notification command or opportunity non-winning command is received. Determine whether or not If an AT win notification command or a chance non-win command is received, it is highly likely that an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific chance has been performed. The AT mode transition lottery based on winning is won (AT winning notification command), or the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won (opportunity non-winning command). In this embodiment, in these cases, the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to execute a result notification effect for notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the result informing effect is that the main character and the enemy character have a battle, and that the main character wins the battle and that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is announced. When the main character is defeated in the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery was not won. More specifically, when the result notification effect occurs, first, as shown in FIG. Show animation of enemy characters. 52(b1) showing the main character attacking, and an attacking production showing the enemy character attacking shown in FIG. 52(b2). The result notification effect ends when either the effect (FIG. 52(c1)) or the defeat effect in which the main character is defeated (FIG. 52(c2)) is performed. In this case, when the AT mode shift lottery that triggered the result notification performance is a winning result, a win performance is executed, and when the AT mode shift lottery is a non-winning result, a defeat performance is executed.

When the AT winning notification command or the opportunity non-winning command is received in step S1609, the processing for executing the result notification effect is performed in steps S1610 to S1613. That is, in step S1610, as the start processing of the result notification effect, the effect setting process for making the start effect of FIG. More specifically, the effect data for the start effect is acquired from the effect table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64) to set the performance data. In this case, the display control device 81 reads out the effect data at the corresponding timing in other processes of step S1511 in the effect setting process (FIG. 40), and notifies correspondingly that the effect is performed with the read data. Control means. By doing so, the effects set in the various effects setting processes are executed at desired timings. Note that the processing related to these effect setting and effect execution is the same for other effects, so the description thereof is basically omitted in the following description.

Incidentally, when the AT mode shift lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity, as already explained, in the rotation effect processing (FIG. 33), the rotation effect is set during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44. be. In this case, when executing the result notification effect for the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity, in the rotation effect, a temporary stop corresponding to the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery and the type of AT mode (Fig. 47 (b2) , before FIG. 47(b3) occurs ((b1) in FIG. 47), the above-described start presentation, victory presentation and defeat presentation are performed. Then, after the victory effect on the result notification effect side is performed and a temporary stop corresponding to the type of AT mode on the rotation effect side is performed, the AT win notification effect of FIG. 47(a) is performed.

On the other hand, when the result notification effect based on the specific combination is performed, the specific combination notification effect is performed before the result notification effect (step S1605). In this case, for example, as a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games, the generation timing of each effect may be set so that a result notification effect is performed, or a specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won It may be set such that the result notification effect is started at a timing after the winning combination notification effect, and the result notification effect ends in the game.

After executing the process of step S1610, in step S1611, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an AT winning notification command. A performance setting process is executed so that the current result notification performance is finally ended as a victory performance. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select the attacking presentation rather than the attacked presentation.

In step S1611, if the command received this time is not the AT winning notification command but the opportunity non-winning command, in step S1613 the result notification effect of this time is finally ended as a defeat effect. Execute the effect setting process. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select the attacked presentation rather than the attack presentation.

If no command has been received in step S1609, or if the processing in step S1612 or step S1613 has been executed, the process advances to step S1614. In step S1614, the first notification process for BB is executed. Such processing is processing for effecting a game using the first BB state and the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1615, other start-time effect setting processing is executed, and then the present start-time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1615, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process in step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, the effect setting process at all stop sets the effect setting when the newly received command is a command at all stop such as a winning result command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, or a lottery trigger command. It is a process to do.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the effect setting for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S1802. For example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not an advantageous zone game command has been received. If the advantageous section game command has been received, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in the previous state, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, lottery opportunity notification processing is executed, and in subsequent step S1806, special notification processing is executed.

After executing the process of step S1802 or step S1806, if the determination in step S1803 is negative, or if the determination in step S1804 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, the BB notification second process is executed. Such processing is processing for effecting a game using the first BB state and the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1808, after executing other all-stop effect setting processing, the present all-stop effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1808, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

<Lottery opportunity notification processing>
In step S1805, in the lottery trigger notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, effect setting is executed for performing the game number notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. The number-of-games notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the occurrence of a specific opportunity. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the games until the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the specific trigger triggered by the setting of the lottery trigger flag, such as "50 games until chance". based on the information of the advantageous interval game number AG of the advantageous interval game command received this time (in FIG. 49(a), the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity will be performed after 50 games). ). In this case, for example, as the game progresses during the advantageous interval, the number of games notified by the number-of-games notification effect is decremented and updated every game (see FIG. 49(b)). Then, when the number of games until the specific opportunity occurs becomes 0 and the specific opportunity occurs, as shown in FIG. 0 games left" is displayed).

In the subsequent step S1902, it is determined whether or not the game to end this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 3-bet game, it is determined in step S1903 whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is determined in step S1902 that the game is not a 3-bet game, or if it is in the first BB state or the second BB state in step S1903, a restricted state (restricted state, restricted game ). In this case, in step S1904, the effect setting for performing the mode shift restriction notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. The mode shift restriction notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the above restricted state. For example, as shown in FIG. !” is displayed to notify the restricted state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903 and after the process of step S1904 is executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not a lottery trigger command has been received. If the lottery opportunity command has not been received, the process for informing the lottery opportunity is terminated. If the lottery trigger command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the game to end this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 3-bet game, it is determined in step S1907 whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state.

If the game is a 3-bet game and not in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets in a non-internal state or an internal state, and execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted. It means that it is an allowable state (allowable game). That is, it is a case where the lottery trigger command is received in the allowable state. In this case, in step S1908, after executing the effect setting for performing the lottery advance notice effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the lottery opportunity informing process is terminated. The lottery advance notice effect informs the player that the lottery trigger command has been received in the allowable state, that is, that the next game will also be executed in the allowable state, and that the AT mode transition lottery will be executed based on the specific trigger. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then the text "Next battle!" conduct.

On the other hand, when the lottery trigger command is received and the game is a 2-bet game, or when the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state, the game is played with bets other than the specific prescribed number. It means that it is in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. In other words, this is the case where the lottery trigger command is received in the restricted state. In this case, in step S1909, after the effect setting for performing the standby effect by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed, the lottery opportunity notification processing is terminated. The standby effect is that the lottery trigger command is received in the restricted state, that is, by executing the game by switching from the restricted state to the allowable state in the next game and thereafter, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then the message "Defeat the enemy with MAX BET" is displayed. !!” is displayed.

It should be noted that MAXBET here means the first credit insertion switch 56 . As already explained, by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the number of bets associated with the MAX bet counter is betted. More specifically, 2 bets are set in the non-internal state, and 3 bets are set in the internal state. is set, and 3 bet is set in the first BB state and the second BB state. In other words, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game is executed with a specific prescribed number of bets (internal state and each BB state), and when the game is not executed with a specific prescribed number of bets (non internal state).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), when the lottery trigger command is received and a specific trigger occurs (when the lottery trigger flag is set), the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 displays a lottery announcement effect or A standby production is executed. Then, when the next game is executed as a 2-bet game in a situation where these lottery notice effects and standby effects are being executed, in the game executed as the 2-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not performed. Not executed. In this case, the standby effect is executed again.

On the other hand, if the next game is executed as a 3-bet game in a situation where the lottery notice effect or standby effect is being executed, a specific opportunity The AT mode transition lottery based on is executed, and the result notification effect (battle effect) based on the AT winning notification command or the opportunity non-winning command is executed.

<Special notification processing>
Next, the special notification processing executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, a process of grasping the above-mentioned trigger through counter is executed. As already explained, the opportunity through counter is a counter that indicates the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity has been unsuccessful. In the subsequent step S2002, it is determined whether or not the first flag is set. If the first flag is set and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode on the low probability side, in step S2003 the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the table storage area 182a is executed. Run. Further, if the first flag is not set in step S2002 and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the second mode on the high probability side, in step S2004 the second special notification is sent from various table storage areas 182a. Execute the process of acquiring the lottery table. Then, in step S2005, special notification lottery processing using the special notification lottery table acquired in step S2003 or step S2004 is executed. The special notification lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to execute a special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery.

Comparing the first special notification lottery table (Fig. 46(a)) and the second special notification lottery table (Fig. 46(b)), the special notification lottery using the second special notification lottery table is better. It is set so that the special notification is likely to occur. That is, the special notification is an effect suggesting that the player is staying in the second mode.

In addition, the first special notification lottery table and the second special notification lottery table are set so that the rate of occurrence of the special notification differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process and the value of the opportunity through counter. is set. More specifically, the higher the set value and the higher the ball payout rate, the higher the occurrence rate of the special notification even with the same value of the opportunity through counter. It is designed to increase the occurrence rate.

After executing the special notification lottery process in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the special notification lottery is won in step S2006. If the special notification lottery is won, in step S2007, effect setting for performing the special notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the special notification processing is terminated. When the special notification lottery is not won, the special notification processing is terminated as it is. As the special notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(b) and FIG. 51(a), a flame flares up behind the main character in the auxiliary display section 65, and the main character's spirit is heightened. is set.

<Game flow>
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 53, description will be given assuming that the game is played in an internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the above internal state is played as a 3-bet game, and the transition to the advantageous interval occurs at the timing of t1 after the advantageous interval transition lottery, the number of games until the lottery opportunity flag is set, that is, the specific opportunity The count of the number of games until occurs is started. Since the game in the 3-bet game in the internal state is a game with a specific prescribed number, the advantageous interval transition lottery is executed as described above, and a transition to an advantageous interval also occurs. Also, an AT mode transition lottery after transition to an advantageous section can be executed, and a transition lottery (mode transition lottery) for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is also executed.

For example, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery shifts to the second mode at timing t2, and shifts to the first mode at timing t3. However, since these lottery modes affect the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger, even if the mode transition occurs at the timing of t2 or t3 before the specific trigger, the mode information will be changed. The used AT mode transition lottery is not executed. At timing t4, when the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section reaches 50 games, a lottery trigger flag is set as a specific trigger has occurred. Then, in the next game, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is executed. In the figure, both the game in which the specific opportunity occurs and the game in which the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is displayed as timing t4. is occurring.

As described above, the transition to the first mode occurs at the timing of t3, and the first mode is maintained until the timing of t4. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger at the timing of t4 is executed in the low-probability first mode. If the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of t4 is not won, the opportunity non-winning flag is set, and the advantageous section ends in the game (Second section display processing).

At the timing of t5, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and counting of the number of games until a specific trigger occurs is started. At the timing of t6, the shift to the second mode occurs, and while the lottery mode is maintained (without shifting to the first mode), when a specific trigger occurs at t7, the AT mode is selected in the second mode on the high probability side. A transition draw will be conducted. If the AT mode shift lottery is won, the display mode shifts to the AT mode, and the AT mode ends at the timing of t8, thereby ending the advantageous section (Second section display processing).

In the case of transitioning to the advantageous section at the timing of t9, if the 3-bet game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t10, execution of the instruction function-related processing is restricted in the 2-bet game, so a mode transition lottery is executed. is also restricted. Then, the first mode before switching to the 2-bet game is maintained.

However, since the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific opportunity is counted regardless of whether or not the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t11, which is 50 games after the timing of t9. , the lottery trigger flag is set. On the other hand, since the AT mode transition lottery is a process related to the instruction function, even if the lottery trigger flag is set, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not executed in the 2-bet game. Then, by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t12, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed. It should be noted that the AT mode transition lottery at t12 is executed in the low-probability first mode, and the drawing shows that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, and it is advantageous at the timing of t12. section ends.

After the transition to the advantageous section at the timing of t13 and the transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing of t14, the mode is changed from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game at the timing of t15. Execution of the transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, the second mode before switching to the 2-bet game is maintained. As described above, the count of the number of games until the occurrence of the specific opportunity is continued even in the 2-bet game, so at the timing of t16, the specific opportunity occurs and the lottery opportunity flag is set. After that, by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t17, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the high probability side second mode. The figure shows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and the AT mode is started at the timing of t17.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a low-probability first mode and a high-probability second mode are provided as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery. Since the specific trigger is configured to occur regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number or not, the specific trigger is generated while maintaining the second mode on the high probability side. It is possible to generate such a specific prescribed number, and it is possible to realize a novel game property using such a specific prescribed number.

In this case, as described above, the player can predict whether the lottery mode is staying in the first mode or the second mode based on the rate of occurrence of the special notification. In other words, when staying in the second mode, the occurrence rate of the special notification is higher than when staying in the first mode, so while referring to the special notification, stay in the second mode It is possible to realize a game such as determining and switching the number of bets.

Moreover, the special notification is more likely to occur as the number of times the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger increases in succession. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not easily won, and a so-called ceiling function can be realized only by using the lottery mode notification such as special notification.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section can end, and when the advantageous section ends, initialization processing of the advantageous section information is executed. Therefore, the number of times in a row that the AT mode shift lottery based on the above-mentioned specific opportunity was not won is stored in the display control device 81 on the sub side, so that the main control device 101 carries over the information for each advantageous section. The ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery can be suitably realized while premised on the configuration that there is no such a case.

Here, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, whether or not to end the advantageous interval according to the upper limit number of games (1500 games) of the advantageous interval instead of ending the advantageous interval each time. A configuration is also conceivable that determines That is, for example, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, if the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the AT mode transition lottery is not won. While the advantageous interval is not ended, if the number of games played is less than a predetermined number, the advantageous interval may be ended when the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In such a configuration, since it is possible for main controller 101 to manage the number of consecutive non-winning prizes, it is possible for main controller 101 to realize a ceiling function. In this case, a command corresponding to the number of consecutive times is output to the display control device 81, and depending on the number of consecutive times, the display control device 81 side manages whether or not special notification is to be executed. If the special notification is to be executed, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 81, thereby realizing the ceiling function based on the occurrence rate of the special notification. be.

On the other hand, for example, if the setting value is changed before the opening of the game hall, etc., the RAM clear processing on the main controller 101 side is executed, and the above-mentioned continuous number managed by the main controller 101 side will be erased. In this case, it is highly likely that whether or not the set value has been changed can be detected depending on whether or not the ceiling function is activated based on the number of consecutive times. In that respect, as described above, by configuring the display control device 81 to manage the number of consecutive times, even if the main control device 101 side executes the RAM clearing process accompanying the change of the set value, the situation will not change. It is possible to activate the ceiling function without being involved. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see whether or not the setting value has been changed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted not only in the 2-bet game in the non-internal state and internal state, but also in the first BB state and the second BB state. In other words, it is possible to restrict the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery not only by switching the number of bets in the non-internal state or the internal state, but also by causing the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state. In particular, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the decrease in tokens per game is suppressed as compared with the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game in the internal state (see FIG. 26), and the state of the first BB state and the second BB state is reached. By making the transition, it becomes possible to execute a game that causes a specific opportunity while restricting the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery while suppressing the reduction of the medals held. Therefore, the game effect processing using the transition of each BB state will be described below.

<First notification process for BB>
First, the first notification process for BB in the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the BB notification first process (start effect setting process) is effect setting based on the start command (lottery result command, AT winning notification command, opportunity non-winning command, etc.) output at the start of the game. This is the process of performing

In step S2101, based on the lottery result command received this time, it is determined whether or not the first BB has been won. If the first BB is won, a process of setting a first BB winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2102. Then, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The first BB end flag and the second BB end flag indicate that the first BB state and the second BB state have already ended, but the CPU 181 understands that the effects corresponding to the first BB state and the second BB state are being continued. is a flag for The processing when these BB end flags are set will be explained in detail after the effects corresponding to each BB state are explained. Here, none of the BB end flags is set. The processing for the case will be described.

That is, if a negative determination is made in step S2103 and none of the BB finished flags is set, the effect setting for performing the first BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2104. . The 1BB win effect is an effect for informing the player that the 1BB win has been won in the current game. For example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that a tank has been obtained as a character corresponding to the 1BB associated with 1BB (the figure shows a tank jumping out of a treasure box).

If it is determined in step S2101 that the first BB is not won, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, based on the lottery result command received this time, it is determined whether or not the second BB has been won. If the 2nd BB is won, a process of setting a 2nd BB-won flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2106. Then, in step S2107, it is determined whether or not the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107 and none of the BB finished flags is set, the effect setting for performing the second BB winning effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed in step S2108. The 2nd BB winning effect is an effect for informing the player that the 2nd BB has been won in the current game. For example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that a sword has been acquired as a character corresponding to the second BB associated with 2BB (the figure shows a state in which the sword jumps out of the treasure box).

If it is determined in step S2105 that the second BB is not won, the process proceeds to step S2109. In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the 1st BB winning completion flag is set. If the 1st BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2110 to determine whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. Here, the first BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the first BB winning, and if the first BB winning flag is set and it is a 3-bet game, the first BB winning is carried over. This means that the internal state is executed in a 3-bet game. In this case, in step S2111, an effect setting for performing the 1st BB winning effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. The 1BB winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the 1BB winning has been carried over and that the 1BB winning is possible in the current game. As shown, a tank is displayed as the character corresponding to the first BB at a predetermined position (left end) of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 .

If the first BB winning flag is not set in step S2109, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning flag is set in step S2112. If the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2113 to determine whether or not the game to be started this time is a 2-bet game. Here, the second BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the second BB winning, and if the second BB winning flag is set and it is a 2-bet game, the second BB winning is carried over. This means that the internal state is executed in a 2-bet game. In this case, in step S2114, an effect setting is executed for performing the second BB winning effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. The second BB winning effect is an effect for informing the player that the second BB winning has been carried over and that the second BB winning is possible in the current game. As shown, a sword as the character corresponding to the second BB is displayed at a predetermined position (left end) of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 .

<Second processing for notification for BB>
Processing for executing effects corresponding to the first BB state and the second BB state is executed in the BB notification second processing. Therefore, prior to the description of the processing in the first BB notification process when the effects corresponding to these BB states are being continued, the second BB notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. . As already explained, the BB notification second process is a process executed in the all-stop effect setting process. A start command, a 1st BB end command, a 2nd BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous zone game command, a lottery trigger command, etc.) is a process for setting effects based on.

In the second notification process for BB, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the first BB start command has been received. When the first BB start command is received, in step S2202, after executing the effect setting for starting the effect for the first BB in the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the second notification process for the BB is terminated. do. The first BB effect is an effect for informing the player that the first BB state is in effect and that the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. , the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the main character riding a tank as the first BB character associated with the first BB character. In addition, when the first BB effect is executed, a character display such as "HOLD!!" is displayed to indicate that the mode transition is restricted. By performing, it is notified that the medal reduction is suppressed. The effect for the first BB continues at least until the processing for ending the effect for the first BB is executed. Then, when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 50 during the first BB state and the lottery trigger command is received, a waiting effect is generated as shown in FIG. 59(a) (step S1909).

If the first BB start command has not been received in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the second BB start command has been received. When the second BB start command is received, in step S2204, after executing the effect setting for starting the second BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the BB notification second process is terminated. do. The second BB effect is a effect for informing the player that the second BB state is in effect and that the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. , the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 displays a state in which the main character is equipped with a sword as the second BB character associated with the second BB corresponding character. In addition, when the 2nd BB effect is executed, the restriction state is notified by the mode shift restriction notification effect with a character display such as "HOLD!!" By performing, it is notified that the medal reduction is suppressed. The effect for the second BB continues at least until the process for ending the effect for the second BB is executed. Then, when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 50 during the second BB state and the lottery trigger command is received, a waiting effect is generated as shown in FIG. 59(b) (step S1909).

If it is determined in step S2203 that the second BB start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the first BB end command has been received. If the first BB end command has been received, processing for setting the first BB end flag is executed in step S2206. Then, in step S2207, a process of inputting "3" as the first predetermined number to the post-end counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed, and then the second notification process for BB is ended. In this embodiment, the first BB effect and the second BB effect are continued until the game after the corresponding BB end game. This is a counter that defines the maximum number of games to be continued even if there is.

If it is determined in step S2205 that the first BB end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the second BB end command has been received. If the second BB end command has been received, a process of setting a second BB end flag is executed in step S2209. Then, in step S2210, the process of inputting "5" as the second predetermined number to the post-end counter is executed, and then the second notification process for BB is ended. In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is a number different from the first predetermined number and is greater than the first predetermined number. It may be the same number as one predetermined number. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the BB notification second process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the BB notification first process, when it is determined that the first BB is won in step S2101 and the first BB finished flag or the second BB finished flag is set in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2115. move on. In step S2115, end processing of the effect for BB being executed is executed. That is, if the effect for the first BB is being executed, the effect for the first BB is ended, and if the effect for the second BB is being executed, the effect for the second BB is ended. It should be noted that the counter is also reset to 0 after the termination of the BB effect. In other words, each BB effect can be continued until the next first BB winning after the BB state ends.

If it is determined in step S2105 that the 2nd BB has been won, and if it is determined in step S2107 that the 1st BB completed flag or the 2nd BB completed flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S2116. In step S2116, similarly to step S2115, end processing of the effect for BB being executed is executed. That is, if the effect for the first BB is being executed, the effect for the first BB is ended, and if the effect for the second BB is being executed, the effect for the second BB is ended. It should be noted that the counter is also reset to 0 after the termination of the effect for BB. In other words, each BB effect can be continued until the next second BB winning after the BB state ends.

After executing any of steps S2104, S2108, S2111, and steps S2114 to S2116, or after making a negative determination in steps S2110, S2112, or S2113, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, it is determined whether or not any BB effect is currently being executed. If one of the BB productions is being executed, in step S2118, it is determined whether or not the first BB finished flag or the second BB finished flag is set, and whether the BB state has already finished or not. determine whether or not If any of the BB completed flags is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the counter after completion is executed in step S2119.

Then, in step S2120, it is determined whether or not the counter has become 0 after the end, and if it has become 0, in step S2121, after executing end processing of the effect for BB being executed, notification for BB is performed. End the first process. That is, if the effect for the first BB is being executed, the effect for the first BB is ended, and if the effect for the second BB is being executed, the effect for the second BB is ended. Also, even if the counter is not 0 after the end, if the AT winning notification command or the opportunity non-winning command is received in step S2122 and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed, Proceeding to step S2121, after performing end processing of the effect for BB that is being executed, the first notification processing for BB is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2117, step S2118 or step S2122, the BB notification first process is terminated.

That is, each BB effect ends when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed after the BB state ends, and even if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not executed. , the next BB winning or the counter becomes 0 after the end.

<Relationship between each BB state and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the playability and the production that causes the specific opportunity while restricting the shift to the lottery mode by shifting to each BB state will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.

For example, in the internal state where the winning of the 2nd BB is carried over, the 3-bet game is played, and at the timing of t21, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the count of the number of games until the specific opportunity is started, the lottery mode is performed at the timing of t22. has shifted to the second mode. After that, the game is switched from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game at the timing of t23 by ascertaining the mode transition using, for example, a special notification. Then, after the specific trigger occurs at the timing of t24, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed by switching to the 3-bet game at the timing of t25. In this case, if the above internal state is played as a 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 coins can be expected per game, and if the internal state is played as a 2-bet game, a decrease of about 0.64 coins can be expected per game. It will be. In other words, about 1.77 medals are reduced per game from t21 to t23, and about 0.64 medals are reduced per game from t23 to t24.

On the other hand, it is assumed that the lottery mode shifts to the second mode at t27 in the case where the advantageous section has started at the timing of t26 and the counting of the number of games until the specific trigger has started. After that, it is assumed that the game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t28, and the 2nd BB win is established at the timing of t29. In this case, although the second BB state from t29 to t31 is played in the 3-bet game, the second mode is maintained because no mode transition occurs. On the other hand, the count of the number of games until the specific opportunity continues, and the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t30. After the second BB state ends at the timing of t31, it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the second mode by switching to the 3-bet game and receiving the AT mode transition lottery.

Here, if the internal state is played as a 3-bet game as described above, about 1.77 coins per game can be expected, and if the internal state is played as a 2-bet game, about 0.64 coins per game can be expected. Where a decrease can be expected, a decrease of about 0.00 medals per game can be expected in the second BB state, and medals are unlikely to decrease (or increase). Then, in the game from t26 to t28, about 1.77 medals are reduced per game, which is the same as in the case of t21 to t23, but in the game from t28 to t29, about 0.64 medals per game. , and no medal reduction occurs in the games from t29 to t31. In other words, the number of games up to the specific opportunity is reduced by the internal state and the 2-bet game by the amount of the second BB winning, and the number of medals to be reduced can be greatly reduced. By doing so, when playing a game that generates a specific opportunity in the restricted state, not only the number of bets is simply changed, but also the action of establishing a bonus prize is added, and the amusement of the game is remarkably improved.

Then, when switching to the 2-bet game at the timing of t28, since the second BB win has already been carried over, as shown in FIG. executed. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the 2nd BB winning can be established immediately, that is, it is possible to wait until the occurrence of the specific opportunity while suppressing the reduction of the medals in hand.

When the 2nd BB prize is established at t29, the 2nd BB effect is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), a mode transition restriction notification effect and a medal reduction suppression effect are also executed, and it can be understood that it is more advantageous for the player than continuing the internal state of the 2-bet game. be done. Then, as the game progresses, the number-of-games notification effect is updated, and when a specific trigger occurs at t30, the standby effect such as "Defeat the enemy with MAXBET!" After the end of the game, it is notified that the lottery for shifting to AT mode based on the specific opportunity is available.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the 3-bet game, the first BB can be won but the second BB cannot be won. It is designed so that you cannot win in 1BB. In the 3-bet game, the 1st BB win can be established but the 2nd BB win cannot be established. It's becoming In other words, if the internal state in which the 2nd BB win is carried over is played in the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB win will not occur, and by switching to the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB win that is carried over can be established. becomes. In this case, if a 3-bet game is played in the non-internal state after the end of the 2nd BB state, the 1st BB can be won and the 1st BB winning can also be established.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the case where the counting of the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t41 and the occurrence of the specific opportunity is started, the first BB winning is established at the timing of t42 which is the first mode. Suppose you let In this case, as described above, although the transition to the lottery mode does not occur during the first BB state, the number of games played up to the specific trigger is counted. can occur. Then, when the first BB state ends at the timing of t44 and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed in the 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first mode with the low probability side as described above. There is a low possibility of winning the AT mode transition.

In other words, in the internal state in which the winning of the first BB is carried over, there is a possibility that the winning of the first BB may occur unintentionally before shifting to the first mode in the 3-bet game. There is a high possibility that the AT mode transition lottery will be a lottery in the low probability side first mode. Therefore, in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB is carried over, while the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is ascertained, before shifting to the 2nd mode, the player is forced to avoid winning the 1st BB every game. become.

Here, in this embodiment, when the first credit insertion switch 56 as the MAXBET button is operated, the number of bets corresponding to the value of the MAX bet counter is betted. , and the MAX bet counter is set to 3 by entering the internal state. In other words, when the first BB state or the second BB state ends and the non-internal state is entered, the MAX bet counter becomes 2, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the non-internal state naturally depends on the two-bet game. A game is played in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted.

That is, at the timing of t44, the MAX bet counter is 2, which means that a 3-bet game has been executed by inserting three medals from the medal insertion slot 45 in the figure. Then, the MAX bet counter is set to 3 by winning the 1st BB at the timing of t45.

Suppose that, in the case of shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t46 and shifting to the second mode at the timing of t47, the game is switched to the 2-bet game at the timing of t48 and the second BB win is established at the timing of t49. In these situations, the MAX bet counter is 3 in the internal state until the second BB win is established at timing t48. Instead, it is necessary to operate the second credit insertion switch 57 or insert medals from the medal insertion slot 45 to place a bet. Since the MAX bet counter is 3 even in the second BB state, a desired game (a game in the restricted state) can be played by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 in the second BB state from t49 to t51. is possible.

After the specific trigger occurs at timing t50, when the second BB state ends at timing t51, the non-internal state is entered. In this case, since the MAX bet counter becomes 2, in the game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the 2-bet game is continued. In the non-internal state, in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won with a relatively high probability of about 1/4.95, and if the 2nd BB prize is not established in the winning game, the internal state is entered. When the internal state is reached, the MAX bet counter becomes 3, and in the game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the game is switched to the 3-bet game at the time of transition to the internal state at t52, and an AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger. will be

In other words, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the high-probability second mode as the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery and suppressing medal reduction, the game that causes the specific opportunity is switched from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game. After the second BB state ends, the restricted state is urged to be maintained until the second BB is won again. By doing so, it is less likely that the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB is carried over will be executed in the 3-bet game. As a result, the phenomenon of receiving the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode of the low probability side by unintentionally establishing the 1BB prize, and the 1BB prize in order to prevent the phenomenon from occurring. It is possible to preferably avoid forcing a game to be avoided every game, and it is possible to realize a smoother game while preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, in order to play the non-internal state after the second BB state as described above in the 2-bet game, the effect during the second BB state can be continued until the internal state is reached. That is, the second BB effect started at the timing of t49 when the state shifts to the second BB state does not end at the timing of t51 when the second BB state ends, and can continue until the timing of t52 when the internal state is reached. By doing so, the specific opportunity has already occurred, and if the player switches to the 3-bet game, it is possible to receive the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity, but switching to the 3-bet game is not possible. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in playing a game in a 2-bet game.

On the other hand, for example, when the game hall is about to close, the playing time is limited, and after the second BB state ends, there are times when the time to play the 2-bet game until the internal state is reached and even the medals are scarce. can be assumed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, bets can be made not only by the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, but also by the medal insertion slot 45. Therefore, after the second BB state ends, the internal state is entered. It is also possible to switch to a 3-bet game immediately after the end of the 2 BB state without playing the 2-bet game until then, and receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity (FIG. 60). By doing so, it is possible to play the game while respecting the intention of the player.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Allowable games (first game, non-internal state or internal state 3-bet game) in which the AT mode transition lottery lottery mode transition can occur, and restricted games in which the AT mode transition lottery lottery mode transition is restricted (second game , BB state game, non-internal state or internal state 2-bet game), and the number of advantageous interval games AG counted regardless of whether it is a permitted game or a restricted game is 50 as a predetermined number. A lottery for shifting to the AT mode is performed using the reaching of the AT mode as a specific trigger. In this manner, after the lottery mode is shifted to the second mode on the high probability side in the allowable game, the shift to the lottery mode is avoided until the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number by switching to the restricted game. It is possible to realize game playability, and to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, not only the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery, but also the AT mode transition lottery itself is restricted by the restricted game. By playing a game, the AT mode transition lottery is performed. By doing so, it is possible not only to determine the second mode and switch to the restricted game, but also to perform the game while grasping that the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches a predetermined number, that is, to switch from the restricted game to the allowed game. It is necessary to grasp the timing, and the playability in the restricted game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the fact that the predetermined number has been reached can be easily recognized by the player through the lottery announcement effect and standby effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In addition, it is possible to grasp the fact that the predetermined number has been reached and the number of games until the predetermined number is reached by the number-of-games notification effect. By doing so, it is possible to play the game while grasping how long it will take for the specific trigger to occur, and not only the presence or absence of BB winning and the timing of switching to the 2-bet game, but also the transition to the second mode. If the situation does not occur, the game can be played while grasping the time limit, which enhances the fun of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the specific opportunity occurs, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first allowed game, so the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the restricted game when the specific opportunity occurs. In addition, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the lottery mode is shifted because the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not performed after switching to the permitted game after the occurrence of the specific opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the game property of switching to the allowable game by ascertaining the occurrence of the specific opportunity.

Furthermore, a special notification is made by winning the special notification lottery, and the probability of winning the special notification lottery is higher when staying in the second mode than when staying in the first mode. It is possible to make the special notification be perceived as a suggestive effect that the user is staying in the second mode. As a result, the player can use the special notification as an indicator to switch from the permitted game to the restricted game.

The special notification lottery is set so that the greater the value of the opportunity through counter that indicates the number of times in a row that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, the easier it is to win the lottery. Notifications are more likely to occur. That is, it becomes easier to determine that the player is staying in the second mode, and as a result, it is possible to easily win the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity. By doing so, it is possible to realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery using the special notification.

In this case, the special notification can be regarded as notification corresponding to the number of bets instead of notification that the player is staying in the second mode. In other words, instead of directly informing the level of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery, it is also possible to make it possible to regard it as a suggestive effect of the type of game to be executed (restricted game and allowed game). As a result, the player can grasp the game to be played from the special notification.

When the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section is terminated, and when the advantageous section is terminated, the main controller 101 side performs the initialization processing of information for the advantageous section. On the other hand, since the trigger through counter that determines the execution probability of the special notification is configured to be managed by the display control device 81 side, the likelihood of winning the AT mode transition lottery can be determined through the special notification across the advantageous section. can be adjusted.

In the special notification lottery, the probability of winning differs depending on the set value set in the process of setting the probability of winning. can also do so through special announcements.

In this case, the special notification is set to be executed as a full stop effect in the all stop effect setting process, and is executed at the end of the game. On the other hand, lottery mode transition processing such as AT lottery mode transition lottery processing is executed in lottery result handling processing on the main controller 101 side. Processing for mode transition is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the game has been switched to the limited game using the special notification as an index, but the lottery mode has already been switched.

In the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, the transition to the first mode or the second mode can occur according to the lottery result of the game. In the game property aiming at receiving the AT mode shift lottery in the side second mode, the lottery result of each game is not neglected, and the attention degree of each game can be avoided from decreasing.

In this case, when it comes to a specific role as a so-called rare role, it is easy to shift from the first mode to the second mode, and when it becomes a so-called normal role of normal reps A to normal reps C, the transition from the second mode to the first mode occurs. On the premise that it is easy to occur, since it is possible to shift from the 1st mode to the 2nd mode even in the normal role, it is not possible to determine the mode transition definitely based on the lottery results of each game. This makes it possible to enhance the fun of the game in which the mode transition is predicted.

When a specific role is won in a permissible game, an AT mode transition lottery can be performed with the specific role as a trigger, so the AT mode transition can occur without going through the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger. As a result, the diversification of games is achieved. Moreover, by doing so, it is possible to enter the second mode while receiving the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific hand in the allowable game rather than the game where only the restricted game is executed and only the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is received. The AT mode transition is more likely to occur in the game waiting for the transition of , and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in the permitted game.

Moreover, although it is possible to win a specific role in a restricted game as a 2-bet game, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery based on the winning of the specific role is restricted. The frustration that the transfer lottery is not performed can be used as a boost to perform the allowable game.

A 2-bet game as a restricted game has a higher game base, which is the average value per game of the difference between the number of medals required for the game and the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, than the 3-bet game as the permitted game. Therefore, by switching to the 2-bet game after ascertaining the transition to the second mode, it is possible to generate a specific opportunity while relatively suppressing the loss of medals. In other words, the earlier the transition to the second mode occurs, and the earlier the transition to the second mode is determined, the fewer the number of medals required to generate a specific trigger, so the transition to the second mode occurs. The degree of attention to the game is dramatically increased, and it is possible to realize an interesting game in consideration of the actual loss of medals.

In addition, if a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is caused as a restricted game, since the game base is set higher than that of the 2-bet game, these BB states have a specific trigger in the 2-bet game. The number of medals required by a specific trigger is less than that which causes In other words, the transition to the 2nd mode is caused earlier, it is determined earlier, and furthermore, the 2nd BB prize and the 1st BB prize are caused earlier, thereby reducing the medal loss required by a specific opportunity. becomes possible. Therefore, in addition to the improvement of the game by creating a room for knowledge intervention such as determining the transition to the second mode, the game is also improved by creating a room for the player's technical intervention such as establishing a BB prize. , it becomes possible to realize a game with unprecedented interest.

In addition, it is not enough to establish BB prizes blindly, but it is necessary to determine BB prize timings because a specific opportunity may not occur depending on the BB prize winning timing or the end timing of the BB state. More specifically, if the BB winning timing is too early, it will be necessary to further play a 2-bet game after the BB state ends, and if the BB winning timing is too late, the BB state will continue even after the specific opportunity occurs. must be digested, and there is concern about a decrease in time efficiency.

In this case, since the number of games AG in the advantageous section is counted in the advantageous section even in the internal state, in the internal state in which the BB winning is carried over, the timing at which the BB winning should be established is determined, and the desired timing is reached. It is possible to play a game in which a BB prize is established at the time of winning. In other words, if the player waits for the BB win at the desired timing and then tries to establish the BB win, the gap between the desired timing and the BB win may become large. In that respect, since it is a game property that allows you to wait for the occurrence of a specific opportunity in the internal state as described above, it is possible to cause the BB prize to occur earlier, and the inconvenience caused by the deviation of the prize timing (especially time efficiency) decrease) can be avoided.

Here, in this embodiment, basically, the 3-bet game in which the winning of the 2nd BB is carried over is used as the normal game, and in the 2nd BB, winning is possible in the 2-bet game, but not in the 3-bet game. Therefore, it is necessary to switch to a 2-bet game in order to play the restricted game while suppressing the loss of medals due to winning the BB. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the 2nd BB win is unintentionally established in the normal game of the 3-bet game, and the game is restricted.

In this case, since the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state and 3 in the internal state, in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, after the BB state ends, the non-internal state is entered. , the game is naturally played as a 2-bet game, and when the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game, an internal state is established and the game is switched to a 3-bet game. As a result, the normal game of the 3-bet game in which the winning of the 2nd BB is carried over is facilitated, and for example, it is possible to make it difficult to play the game in a state in which the winning of the 1st BB is carried over. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being forced to perform a stop operation to avoid winning the first BB in the allowable game, and the game can proceed smoothly.

On the other hand, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45, a 2-bet game can be performed. In addition, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56, it is possible to play a 3-bet game. and Therefore, it is allowed to play a 3-bet game before winning the second BB after the BB state ends, such as just before the game hall closes. In this way, the winning of the second BB is possible within a range that does not spoil the real thrill of the game of the slot machine 10, in which the game is started by the player's own start operation and the game is ended by the player's own end operation. It is possible to make a game to be carried over.

As described above, after the BB state ends, it is made easy to play the 2-bet game until the second BB is won, and the BB effect is also continued until the second BB is won. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with being recommended to play the non-internal state in the 2-bet game even though the BB state has ended.

However, for example, after the BB state ends, such as just before the game hall closes, as described above, before winning the 2nd BB, switch to the 3-bet game, and a game that wants to receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity However, after the end of the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity, and the BB effect is ended, so only the BB effect is available. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as continuation.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the second BB is not won after the BB state ends, the BB effect is finished after a predetermined number of games (3 or 5 games). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the BB effect continues endlessly even though the second BB is not won. Incidentally, after the end of the second BB state, the number of games in which the second BB effect can continue is set as a number larger than the denominator of the probability of winning the second BB (approximately 1/4.95). , the effect for the second BB ends based on the winning of the second BB.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the AT lottery mode shift lottery process is used to switch between the first mode and the second mode. The configuration is such that switching to and from the second mode occurs.

FIG. 62(a) is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition game processing in this modified example. As already described, the advantageous section transition game processing is executed as processing on the main controller 101 side in the game transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing.

In step S2301, lottery processing for the mode transition table is executed. That is, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 63(a), there are a plurality of types of mode transition tables in which the relationship between the number of games AG in the advantageous interval and the transition games to the first mode and the second mode are set. It is stored in the various table storage area 105a. More specifically, for example, in the mode transition table of the address information M0001, the second mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1 to 10, and the first mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 11 to 49. Indicates that it is set. Further, in the mode transition table of the address information M0005, the second mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is 1 to 40, and the first mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous interval is 41 to 49. showing. The process of step S2301 is a process of determining, by lottery, the mode transition table to be used in the current advantageous section from the plurality of stored mode transition tables.

In more detail about the mode transition tables that are set in a plurality of types, each mode transition table is set so that the first mode and the second mode may occur in any number of advantageous section games AG. is set. In other words, it is set so that the type of the lottery mode is not determined only by the number of games AG in the advantageous interval. In addition, the mode transition table in this modification is set to include at least the second mode section, and the mode transition table is not set such that the first mode is set regardless of the value of the number of games AG in the advantageous section. not On the other hand, in the mode transition table of the address information MXXX, the advantageous section game number AG is set to the second mode for all values from 1 to 49, and the mode transition table does not include the first mode section. It has become.

In step S2302, the address information of the determined mode transition table is stored in the address information storage area 106f based on the processing result of step S2301. After that, in step S2303, after executing a process of setting the table command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the advantageous section transition game process is terminated. The table command contains information on the type of mode transition table set for the current transition to the advantageous section.

In the display control device 81, for example, as the table notification processing (FIG. 62(b)) executed in step S1615 (other start-time effect setting processing) in the start-time effect setting processing, Action is set.

That is, in the table notification processing, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not a table command has been received. A process of storing in the address information storage area 183c is executed. If the information of the mode transition table has already been stored, the information is erased and then the information of the new mode transition table is stored. If the table command has not been received at step S2311, the table notification process is terminated.

After executing the processing of step S2312, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the trigger through counter is greater than a predetermined number (5). If the number is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the table notification processing is terminated. If the number is larger than the predetermined number, that is, if the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger has not been won is greater than the predetermined number, table notification lottery processing is executed in step S2314. The table notification lottery process is a process of drawing lots to determine whether information on the type of mode transition table this time is to be notified. the probabilities are different. More specifically, for example, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. The types of the mode transition table are set so that, for example, a mode transition table in which a longer section of the second mode is ensured is more likely to win the table notification lottery.

After the table notification lottery process is executed in step S2314, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S2315. In the case of winning, in step S2316, the stored mode transition table is read out, and the process of acquiring effect data corresponding to the mode transition table from the RAM 183 is executed. As shown in FIG. 63, the effect data corresponding to the mode transition table is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the mode transition table. identifiably different. Instead of the configuration in which the mode transition table and the performance data are associated one-to-one, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of mode transition tables and one performance data are associated, or one mode transition. A configuration in which a table and a plurality of effect data are associated with each other may also be used.

After the effect data is acquired in step S2316, the effect setting for executing the table notification effect based on the acquired effect data in step S2317 is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then the table notification is performed. end the processing. As the table notification effect, for example, one table notification effect is performed by combining the color and type of the background of the auxiliary display portion 65, the position where the main character is displayed, and the size of the main character. For example, when the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 is blue, the display position of the main character is in the center, and the display size of the main character is in the middle, a table corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0001 is notified. Even if the background color and the position of the main character are the same, if the display size of the main character is large, the table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0002 is performed, and the background color and the main character are the same. Even at the position of , if the display size of the main character is small, a table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of the address information M0003 is produced. A corresponding table notification effect is configured. In this case, the player can predict the mode transition table set at the time of transition to the advantageous section based on the table notification effect.

In addition to or in place of a configuration in which the effect mode of the table notification effect is set in a one-to-one relationship with each mode transition table and one mode transition table can be specified from the table notification effect, a plurality of mode transition tables are provided. , one table notification effect is associated with each other, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to specify one mode transition table from the table notification effect. In this case, for example, each mode transition table may be classified according to the number of games to be assigned to the second mode, the timing of the game in the second mode, etc., and each classification may be associated with a table notification effect.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this modification. As already explained, the AT lottery process is a process executed in the lottery result handling process, and is allowed to be executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, and is executed when the bet number is not a specific prescribed number but in a restricted state. is restricted.

In step S2401, by reading the address information of the mode transition table stored in the address information storage area 106f, the process of grasping the mode transition table set in the current advantageous section is executed. In the subsequent step S2402, a process of grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous section is executed. Then, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the first mode by comparing the mode transition table with the number of games in the advantageous interval AG.

For example, when the mode transition table is for the address information M0001, the second mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1 to 10, and the first mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 11 to 49. However, in step S2403, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is between 11 and 49, it is determined that the current game corresponds to the first mode.

If it is determined in step S2403 that the game corresponds to the first mode, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not the first mode flag has already been set. If the first mode flag is not set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the second mode, a process for setting the first mode flag is executed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, a process of setting the first mode shift command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

If the determination in step S2403 is negative, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the game corresponds to the second mode. That is, if the mode transition table is for the address information M0001, and if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is between 1 and 10, then it is determined that the current game corresponds to the second mode.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the game corresponds to the second mode, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the first mode flag is set. When the first mode flag is set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the first mode, the process of clearing the first mode flag is executed in step S2409. Then, in step S2410, a process of setting the second mode shift command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

If the determination in step S2404 is affirmative, if the processing in step S2406 or step S2410 is executed, or if the determination in step S2407 or step S2408 is negative, the process advances to step S2411. At steps S2411 to S2416, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in the same manner as the processes at steps S812 to S817. Further, in steps S2417 to S2424, similar to the processing in steps S818 to S824, processing is executed according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

Here, in the mode transition table, as shown in FIG. 63, the lottery mode for which the number of games AG in the advantageous section is 50 or higher is not defined. That is, when the number of games AG in the advantageous section is 50 or more, a negative determination is made in both steps S2403 and S2407. Then, after the number of games AG in the advantageous interval reaches 50 and the specific trigger occurs, the lottery mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery does not occur regardless of the value of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG.

In this way, when a game is played with a specific specified number of bets, switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs in accordance with the value of the number of advantageous interval games AG. When a game is played, the switching between the first mode and the second mode does not occur regardless of the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG.

More specifically, for example, in the case where the mode transition table of the address information M0001 is set, the second mode is set for games with an advantageous interval game number AG up to 10, and the first mode is set for games after 11. , by switching from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game in games where the number of advantageous interval games AG is up to 10, the game can be played in a restricted state, thereby allowing the game to proceed while maintaining the second mode. . After the opportunity lottery flag is set when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 50, it is possible to receive the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity in the second mode by switching to the 3-bet game.

As described above, in this modification, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous interval AG. From the number AG, it becomes possible for the game machine side to grasp in advance. That is, in the first embodiment, through the AT lottery mode transition lottery process in the allowable game, because the lottery mode is configured to shift, specify the shift of the lottery mode until the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is performed. Although it is not possible to do so, it is possible to grasp the lottery mode in advance by using the above modified example. Moreover, even if the transition to the lottery mode does not actually occur in the permitted game, it is possible to grasp which lottery mode will be if the permitted game in the restricted game. It is also possible to implement a game that allows players to know when to switch to a 3-bet game, such as when switching to a 2-bet game regardless of the current mode.

A plurality of mode transition tables are stored in advance as mode transition tables, and these plurality of mode transition tables are set so that it is not determined which mode the player is staying in from the number of games AG in the advantageous section. More specifically, for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous interval (advantageous interval game number AG) is 1 game to 10 games, the mode transition table of the address information M0001 sets the second mode, but the address If it is the mode transition table of the information M0002, it is set to the first mode, if it is the 11th game to the 20th game, it is set to the first mode if it is the mode transition table of the address information M0001, and is set to the second mode if it is the address information M0002. There is a mode transition table that is set to each lottery mode for each number of games so that the lottery mode you are staying in will not be determined only by the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section, such as being set to the mode. set. By doing so, the significance of playing a game in which the mode transition table is predicted is ensured.

On the other hand, at the time of transitioning to the advantageous section, that is, when setting the mode transition table, an effect that suggests each mode transition table can be performed as a table notification effect. It is possible to play a game for predicting the lottery mode in which the player is currently staying or the future lottery mode based on the content of the table notification performance.

In this case, for example, when an effect corresponding to the address information M0001 is performed as the table notification effect, any game from the 1st game to the 10th game may be played as the allowed game after the transition to the advantageous section. As for the later games, it is necessary to play the restricted games until a specific opportunity occurs. In other words, if it can be detected by the 10th game that the mode transition table of the address information M0001 has been set from the table notification effect or the special notification, the game is switched to the restricted game by the 11th game, and the game is played until the 49th game. By doing so, it becomes possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity while maintaining the second mode. In other words, in this case, if the mode transition table cannot be detected by the 10th game, or if any of the games from the 11th game to the 49th game are played with the allowable game, the AT mode based on the specific opportunity is activated. The transition lottery must be received in the first mode on the low-probability side. By doing so, the importance of detecting the mode transition table and switching to the restricted game is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, for example, when an effect corresponding to the address information M0005 is performed as the table notification effect, any game from the 41st game to the 49th game may be played as the allowed game after the transition to the advantageous section. The later games can be played with the restricted game. That is, after it can be detected from the table notification effect or the special notification that the mode transition table of the address information M0005 has been set, at least the 48th game may be played as a restricted game, for example, 2 bets. It is possible to wait for the specific opportunity and the transition to the second mode while suppressing the reduction of medals in the game. In this case, for example, although it is possible to further suppress the decrease of medals in the restricted game by establishing the 2BB winning, for example, the 2BB winning is caused in the 5th game, and the 2BB state is 44 games. If it continues, the end game in the second BB state will be the 49th game, and any of the games from the 41st game to the 49th game cannot be played as the allowed game. In other words, the opportunity to shift to the second mode is lost. Then, even if the second BB win is established, the importance of the winning timing will increase, and the number of continuous games in the second BB state (the lottery results of each game in the second BB state) will also attract more attention. will be significantly increased. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

The table notification effect is executed through a table notification lottery, and the table notification lottery is set so that the probability of winning differs depending on the set value and the value of the opportunity through counter. More specifically, it is set so that the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. By doing so, the more the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the more likely the opportunity to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode will occur, and the higher the setting, the more likely the opportunity to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode. becomes more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to realize the setting difference of the AT mode transition rate through the table notification effect, and it is also possible to realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition by the table notification effect.

Furthermore, the table notification lottery is set so that the probability of winning differs depending on the type of the set mode transition table. More specifically, the types of mode transition tables are set so that, for example, a mode transition table in which a longer section of the second mode is ensured is more likely to win the table notification lottery. By doing so, it is possible to solve the absurdity that the player cannot perceive the selection of a table with a long section, which is the second mode, without being informed of it. .

<Modification 2>
A modified example of the BB state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in this modification, the benefits corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor wins in the 2-bet game are different from those in the first embodiment. In the example, as a privilege corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor wins, the same number of medals as the number of bets is paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state in this modified example, the common bell with the index value IV=10 has a high probability (100% probability in this modified example). is set to win at

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modification.

The processing of steps S2601 to S2603 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S503, and when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and the state shifts to the internal state, the processing of setting the MAX bet counter to 3 is executed. . When it is determined in step S2604 that the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established, in this modification, a process of setting the MAX bet counter to 2 is executed in step S2605. Then, when it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB winning has been established, in this modification, processing of inputting 110 to the BB counter is executed in step S2607. After that, in step S2608, the 1BB winning flag is cleared, in step S2609, the 1BB state flag is set, and in step S2610, the 1BB start command is set. After setting, end the bonus state processing. That is, in this modification, the first BB state is executed in a 2-bet game, and ends when 110 medals are paid out. In addition, in the first BB state, since a common bell that causes two medals to be paid out is always won, 55 games are required to complete the first BB state. In other words, the number of games required to end the 1BB state is greater than the number of games required to cause the specific trigger, and by shifting to the 1BB state, after the end of the 1BB state An AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger can be executed in the lottery mode before the transition to the first BB state.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB winning has not been established, the process advances to step S2612 to execute processing of inputting 50 to the BB counter. After that, the second BB winning flag is cleared in step S2613, the second BB state flag is set in step S2614, the second BB start command is set in step S2615, and the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611. After setting, end the bonus state processing. That is, in this modification, the second BB state is also executed as a two-bet game, and the game ends when 50 medals, which are less than the first BB state, are paid out. Also in the second BB state, since a common bell that causes two medals to be paid out is always won, 25 games are required to complete the second BB state. In other words, the number of games required to end the second BB state is less than the number of games required to cause the specific trigger. An AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity can be executed in a lottery mode different from the lottery mode before transition to the 2BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, in steps S2616 to S2618, similarly to steps S515 to S517, the BB counter is subtracted based on the winning of a minor winning combination. Then, when the BB counter becomes 0 or less, the corresponding BB status flag is cleared in step S2619, the corresponding BB end command is set in step S2620, and the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 in step S2621. After setting, end the bonus state processing. That is, the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are performed in a 2-bet game, and the MAX bet counter is set to 2. Therefore, in this modified example, the MAX bet counter is changed when transitioning to the non-internal state. (Step S519) is not performed.

As shown in FIGS. 65(c1) and 65(c2), in the lottery result handling process and the prize winning result handling process in this modified example, when it is not a specific prescribed number according to the game state, the execution of the process related to the instruction function is performed. In the restricting process, it is determined in steps S2501 and S2511 whether or not any of the BB state flags have been set. It is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game. If the game is a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and winning result handling process are terminated as they are without performing subsequent processes. Further, even when any of the BB status flags is set, it is determined in steps S2503 and S2513 whether or not the game is a 3-bet game. If the game is a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and winning result handling process are terminated as they are without performing subsequent processes. In other words, 3 is set as the specific specified number for all of the non-internal state, internal state, and BB state, and in the case of a 3-bet game, the processing (step The processing after S604 and the processing after step S1104) are executed.

Processing related to the opportunity through counter in this modification will be described. As already explained, the opportunity through counter is a counter corresponding to the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity was not won. The incidence of special announcements suggesting Further, in Modification 1, the table notification effect for the mode transition table is more likely to occur as the value of the opportunity through counter increases. In this modification, depending on the type of state when a specific trigger occurs, including the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state that require different numbers of games to complete as described above, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will not be won. Different values are added to the opportunity through counter when

FIG. 67(a) shows the trigger adjustment process in this modified example. The trigger adjustment process is executed as a process on the display control device 81 side, for example, in the other all-stop effect setting process in the all-stop effect setting process.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not a lottery trigger command has been received. If it has not been received, the adjustment process is terminated. If so, the process advances to step S2702 to determine whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state. If the specific trigger occurred during the first BB state, the process for setting the first BB trigger flag in the various flags storage area 183a is executed in step S2703, and then this adjustment process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the process advances to step S2704 to determine whether or not the current game state is the second BB state. If the specific trigger has occurred during the second BB state, the second BB trigger flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S2705, and then this adjustment process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the process advances to step S2706 to determine whether or not the current game is a 2-bet game. If it is a specific opportunity generated in a 2-bet game, a process of setting a 2-bet opportunity flag in the various flags storage area 183a is executed in step S2707, and then this adjustment process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2706 that the specific opportunity has occurred in the 3-bet game, this adjustment processing is terminated.

FIG. 67(b) is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery mode notification process in this modified example.

After a negative determination is made in step S1703 or the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not a chance non-winning command has been received, as in step S1705. If the command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity has not been won, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the first BB opportunity flag has been set. If it is set, a process of clearing the first BB trigger flag is executed in step S2713.

If the first BB trigger flag is not set in step S2712, it is determined whether or not the second BB trigger flag is set in step S2714. If it is set, a process of clearing the second BB trigger flag is executed in step S2715, and a process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2716.

If the second BB opportunity flag is not set in step S2714, it is determined whether or not the 2-bet opportunity flag is set in step S2717. If it is set, a process of clearing the 2-bet opportunity flag is executed in step S2718, and a process of adding 2 to the opportunity through counter is executed in step S2719. Then, if the 2-bet opportunity flag is not set in step S2717, a process of adding 3 to the opportunity through counter is executed in step S2720.

If the negative determination in step S2711, or step S2713, step S2716, step S2719 and step S2720 after executing any of the process, proceed to step S1707, the determination of whether or not received the AT winning notification command conduct.

That is, the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity that occurred during the second BB state is better than the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity that occurs during the first BB state. When the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the value added to the opportunity through counter is large, 0 is added in the case of the first BB state, and 1 is added in the case of the second BB state. In addition, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity that occurred during the 2-bet game is more likely than the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity that occurs during the first BB state or the second BB state. When the AT mode transition lottery is not won, there are many values added to the opportunity through counter, 0 or 1 is added in the case of the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and 2 is added in the case of a 2 bet game. be done. The AT mode transition lottery is more likely to be drawn based on a specific opportunity that occurs during a 3-bet game than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity that occurs during a 2-bet game. In the case of non-winning, the value added to the opportunity through counter is large, 2 is added in the case of a 2-bet game, and 3 is added in the case of a 3-bet game.

As described above, by shifting to the 1BB state, it is possible to finish 55 games while suppressing the reduction of medals, and regardless of the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section, the transition to the 1BB state is possible. It is possible to create a specific opportunity without reducing the medals you have. On the other hand, by shifting to the 2nd BB state, it is possible to complete 25 games while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held, and by causing the 2nd BB winning when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 25 or later, the 2nd BB It is possible to cause a specific trigger during the state. In other words, in both the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG while restricting mode transitions, but the number of continuous games is different, and the first BB state is better than the second BB state. The number of continuous games is longer than in the second BB state.

In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the lottery mode is defined by the mode transition table as in Modification 1, the AT mode transition lottery based on the current specific opportunity is performed in the second mode based on the table notification effect. The act of giving up on receiving is assumed. More specifically, by the table notification effect, it is grasped that the mode transition table that makes it difficult to shift to the second mode on the high probability side is selected, or the mode transition table is specified by not performing the table notification effect. If it is not possible, it is conceivable that by shifting to the first BB state, an act of proceeding with the game while suppressing the reduction of the medals held until the next mode transition table selection trigger is performed. Therefore, when a specific trigger occurs during the first BB state as in the above configuration, even if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won, the trigger through counter will have a smaller number than normal. By adopting a configuration in which values are added (not added), the generation of the specific trigger via the first BB state as described above is repeated, thereby unduly increasing the occurrence rate of the special notification and the table notification effect. can be resolved.

Also, when a specific opportunity occurs during the second BB state, it is possible that at least about 25 games were played in the non-internal state or the internal state during the advantageous interval this time, in addition to the 25 games in the second BB state. highly sexual. As already explained, the number of tokens decreased per game is larger in the non-internal state and the internal state than in the first BB state and the second BB state. Therefore, in such a case, by increasing the value added to the trigger through counter in the case of the second BB state than in the case of the first BB state, it is possible to reduce It can be used as compensation for the decrease in medals.

Furthermore, even in the non-internal state and the internal state, the number of medals decreased per game is greater in the 3-bet game than in the 2-bet game. Moreover, in the 3-bet game, the transition to the lottery mode can occur. Therefore, even after the transition to the second mode, it is possible to shift to the first mode before a specific opportunity occurs by playing the 3-bet game. There is also a possibility that it will be lost. Therefore, by increasing the value added to the opportunity through counter in the 3-bet game than in the case of the 2-bet game, the decrease in medals in the above-mentioned non-internal state and internal state, and the delay in shifting to the lottery mode It can be used as compensation for risk.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the number of games required until a specific trigger occurs is determined by lottery. FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition game processing in this modified example. Note that this modification will be described based on the first embodiment.

In step S2801, lottery processing for the opportunity game is executed. The lottery process of the opportunity game is a process of determining by lottery the number of games in the advantageous interval required until the specific opportunity occurs. Randomly determined as the number of games. In such a lottery, the setting value may affect the number of games, such that the higher the setting value, the easier it is for a smaller number of games to be selected, and the lower the setting value, the easier it is for a larger number of games to be selected.

In step S2802, the number of opportunity games determined in step S2801 is stored in the various counter areas 106e by, for example, entering it into the opportunity counter. Then, in step S2803, after executing a process of setting the opportunity game number command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this advantageous interval transition game process is terminated.

The display control device 81 may be configured not to execute the number-of-games notification effect, the lottery advance notice effect, or the standby effect, for example, so that the player cannot or cannot identify the occurrence of the specific trigger. By doing so, in addition to the game of predicting that the lottery mode has shifted to the second mode on the high probability side, the game of predicting the occurrence of a specific opportunity and the number of games required until the specific opportunity occurs. It is possible to add and make the game more interesting.

In this case, for example, the number of games notification effect, lottery notice effect, standby effect, etc. may be determined by lottery, etc., and the set value or the value of the opportunity through counter may be used to determine the probability of winning the lottery. It is good also as a structure which influences. That is, the higher the setting value, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects, and the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects.

FIG. 68(b) is a flow chart showing the lottery opportunity determination process in this modified example.

In step S2811, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG matches the number of opportunity games (opportunity counter) stored in step S2802. If it is not the opportunity game, the lottery opportunity determination processing is terminated as it is. If it is the number of trigger games, the lottery trigger flag is set in step S2812, and the lottery trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S2813. End the process.

By doing so, the number of games in which the specific opportunity occurs is diversified, so that when the game required until the specific opportunity occurs is played in the restricted game, the player can decide how long the restricted game should be continued. hard to understand. Therefore, not only the game of predicting the lottery mode, but also the game of predicting the occurrence of the specific trigger is added, and the interest in the game is improved.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the mode of execution of the special notification is different. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in this modification. As already described, the special notification process is a process executed in step S1806 in the effect setting process at all stop.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the current game is an advantageous section transition game. In the case of the advantageous interval transition game, a process of grasping the opportunity through counter is executed in step S2902. Then, in step S2903, a transfer navigation lottery process is executed. The transition navigation lottery process is a process for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute transition navigation notification that the lottery mode has shifted from the first mode to the second mode. In the transition navigation lottery process, the transition navigation lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the execution lottery for the transition navigation notification is performed. As shown in FIG. 70, the migration navigation lottery table is set so that the winning rate of the migration navigation lottery differs depending on the opportunity through counter and the set value. It is set so that it becomes easy to be elected, so that it is high. Also, when the value of the Opportunity Through Counter is small, it is set so that it is easier to win with an even number setting than with an odd number setting. It is designed to make it easier to win.

In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the transfer navigation lottery in step S2903 is won.If the lottery is won, in step S2905, a process of setting a navigation flag in the flag storage area 183a is executed. The navigation flag is a flag for grasping in advance that a special notification will be executed when the lottery mode shifts to the first mode or the second mode.

That is, in this modification, the display control device 81 side does not grasp in real time whether the mode is the first mode or the second mode, and only detects that the lottery mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode. It is configured to be understood. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71, in the AT lottery mode notification process in this modification, when the first mode transition command or the second mode transition command is received in step S3001, in step S3002 It is determined whether or not the above navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, a special notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S3003.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001 or step S3002, or after the processing in step S3003 is executed, processing for managing the opportunity through counter is executed in steps S3004 to S3007. The processes of steps S3004 to S3007 are the same as the processes of steps S1705 to S1708.

Returning to the description of the special notification process, if a negative determination is made in step S2901 or step S2904, or if the process of step S2905 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag is set. When the special notification flag is set, the special notification flag is cleared at step S2907, and at step S2908, the special notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 as an effect at the time of all stops. After executing the effect setting for the special notification, the special notification processing is terminated.

That is, in this modification, a special notification can be executed as an effect when the game transitions from the first mode to the second mode or the game transitions from the second mode to the first mode. Therefore, the player who confirms the special notification can determine whether the lottery mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode based on the lottery result of the game, the presence or absence of the special notification in the previous game, the lottery result, etc. Alternatively, after predicting whether the mode has shifted from the second mode to the first mode, when it is predicted that the mode has shifted to the second mode, the next game is switched to the restricted game, and a specific opportunity is generated while maintaining the second mode. It is possible to By doing so, the lottery result of the game can be taken into consideration in performing the predictive game of the mode transition, and the lottery mode can be predicted by adding the pleasure of considering the game lottery result, rather than the configuration in which the second mode is directly notified by the special notification. It is possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

That is, the transition from the 1st mode to the 2nd mode is likely to occur in a specific role as a so-called rare role, and can occur in some normal reps A to C, while the transition from the 2nd mode to the 1st mode , It does not occur in the specific role, and it is configured to occur in the normal response A to normal response C, but if the special notification occurs in the game in which the specific role is won, it is confirmed that the transition to the second mode has occurred. do. On the other hand, when a special notification occurs in a game in which normal reply A to normal reply C is won, there are cases where the shift to the first mode occurred, and there was a shift to the second mode. There will also be cases. Then, for example, if a special notice occurs in a game in which a specific role is won, and then a special notice occurs in a game in which a normal reply A to normal reply C is won, the normal reply A to normal reply C winning game The special notification in the lottery mode is likely to correspond to the transition to the first mode. It becomes necessary to make predictions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the display control device 81 side does not grasp the first mode or the second mode, and is configured to be able to notify the transition to the lottery mode. For this reason, the main controller 101 side concentrates on the main controller 101 side the processes related to the player's interests, such as the lottery process of each game, the management of the advantageous section, and whether or not to change the display mode. By consolidating into , it is possible to realize game characteristics using the lottery mode while securing the significance of dispersing the processing load and facilitating fraud countermeasures by consolidating the control devices that should take countermeasures against fraud. It becomes possible.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the mode of execution of the AT mode transition lottery is changed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in this embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the random number acquisition process (step S3117) is executed after the second section display process is executed and before the winning result command is executed. The processing (steps S3101 to S3116, step S3118) is the same as the processing of steps S401 to S417 in the first embodiment.

<Random number acquisition processing>
The random number acquisition process in step S3117 is a process for acquiring in advance a random number for lottery to be used for the AT mode transition lottery. As described above, the random number acquisition process is performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the reel control process. In other words, among the stopping operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the third stopping operation is performed based on the third stop OFF operation.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If none of the BB status flags have been set, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the game to end this time was a 3-bet game. If it is determined in step S3201 that any BB status flag is set, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the game to end this time is a 2-bet game. That is, the processing of steps S3201 to S3203 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, and determines whether or not the execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted. is a process for determining whether the state is restricted. If it is determined at step S3202 that the game is a 2-bet game, and if it is determined at step S3203 that it is a 3-bet game, a process of acquiring a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is executed from step S3204. Random number acquisition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined to be a 3-bet game in step S3202 or if it is determined to be a 2-bet game in step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, a process of acquiring AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter corresponds to a random number for the lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT counter is incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 128 each time the timer update process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process is started. A loop counter that increments and returns to 1 after reaching a maximum value (ie 128).

It should be noted that, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine the suitability of the role, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit are used, and before the processing of step S3204 (for example, at the time of the third stop ON operation) A hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter and read the latched value in step S3204. Note that the latched value may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 106 until the process of step S3204 is performed.

In step S3205, a process of storing the value of the AT counter acquired in step S3204 in the lottery information storage area 106g of the RAM 106 is executed. The lottery information storage area 106g, as shown in FIG. 74, comprises a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The memory area RE consists of a plurality of memory areas, and includes a first memory area RE1 to a tenth memory area RE10.

In the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10, the AT counters are stored in the order of the first storage area RE1→second storage area RE2→third storage area RE3 . are stored chronologically. Since ten storage areas are provided as a plurality of storage areas, up to ten random numbers for lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S3205, the value of the AT counter acquired in step S3204 is stored in the area with the smallest number (the youngest area) among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, if the AT counter value is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9, and the tenth storage area RE10 is an empty area, then in step S3205 the The resulting AT counter value is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the AT counter value as it is, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the AT counter value is stored. For example, the AT counter value is converted into a value for AT mode lottery. The configuration may be such that the data is stored first.

In step S3206, processing for setting the AT command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the random number acquisition processing is terminated. The AT command includes information corresponding to the AT counter values stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10 in addition to the information corresponding to the AT counter values stored this time. Therefore, the display control device 81 can grasp the information of each storage area RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106g by receiving the AT command.

The random number acquisition process is started regardless of the lottery result of each game, and the AT counter is acquired regardless of the lottery result of each game. That is, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing in this embodiment.

This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that random number shift processing is performed to update the AT counter storage area acquired in the random number acquisition processing for each game in which the AT mode transition lottery can be executed. This is different from the lottery result handling process. That is, in steps S3301 to S3303, in the same way as in steps S601 to S603, after executing the process of determining whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, in step S3304 a random number Execute shift processing. After executing the random number shift process, in steps S3305 to S3313, similar to steps S604 to S612, as the process related to the instruction function, the process for transitioning to the advantageous section, the process for AT mode, and the pressing order are performed. Perform processing for notification, etc.

<Processing for random number shift>
The random number shift processing in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S3401, among the storage areas RE1 to RE10, random number information for lottery (information corresponding to the AT counter) stored in the first storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE. 1. Perform processing to clear the random number information stored in the storage area RE1. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the current game. Then, in the AT mode transition lottery, the information corresponding to the AT counter stored in the execution area AE is acquired as the random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information shifted to the execution area AE among the information of the AT counter acquired in advance.

In the subsequent step S3402, processing is performed to shift the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared. The information in each area is shifted in the order of second memory area RE2, fourth memory area RE4→third memory area RE3, . . . tenth memory area RE10→ninth memory area RE9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9, and new information is not shifted. That is, the information in the tenth memory area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth memory area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the following step S3403, after executing the process of setting the shift time command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the random number shift process ends. The shift time command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the shift of the AT counter has been performed.

Next, the AT lottery process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, first, lottery mode processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3501 to S3505, and then AT mode transition lottery processing is executed in steps S3506 to S3518.

Here, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific occasion described in the first embodiment is not set, and if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific occasion is not won, The configuration (step S1313) in which the advantageous section ends is also not set. That is, as shown in FIG. 78, in the second section display process in this embodiment, similar to steps S1301 to S1307, after executing the processing in the advantageous section in steps S3601 to S3607, in step S3608 It is determined whether or not the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S3609 to S3611 in the same manner as in steps S1309 to S1311. . If the forced termination condition is not met, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the AT mode termination flag is set.If it is set, the process proceeds to step S3609 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section. do. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the section display second process is ended.

Further, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery in the present embodiment is defined by the mode transition table and the number of games AG in the advantageous section, as in Modification 1 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, the mode transition table according to the present embodiment is similar to the mode transition table of Modification 1 of the first embodiment. 1 mode and a second mode on the high probability side are set respectively. In this embodiment, the lower two digits of the value of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval are associated with the lottery mode. If the last two digits of the number AG are 1-59, the first mode is selected, and if the last two digits are 60-99, the second mode is selected. In the present embodiment as well, in more detail about the mode transition table, which is set in a plurality of types, the first mode and the second mode may occur for any value of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG. Each mode transition table is set as follows. In other words, it is set so that the type of the lottery mode is not determined only by the number of games in the advantageous section AG. Also, the mode transition table in this embodiment is set so as to include at least the second mode section, and the mode transition table for the first mode is not set regardless of the value of the advantageous section game number AG. . On the other hand, in the mode transition table of the address information MXXXX, the advantageous section game number AG is set to the second mode with all values from 1 to 99, and the mode transition table does not include the section of the first mode. It has become.

The mode transition table is updated every predetermined number of games, and in this embodiment, it is updated every 100 games after the transition to the advantageous section. In the advantageous interval transition game processing executed in the advantageous interval transition game in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79A, mode transition table lottery processing is executed in step S3701. In subsequent step S3702, based on the processing result of step S3701, the address information of the determined mode transition table is stored in the address information storage area 106f. Thereafter, in step S3703, a process of setting the table command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step S3704, after executing the process of inputting 100 to the mode transition trigger counter in the various counter areas 106e, this advantageous section transition game process is terminated. The mode transition trigger counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the lottery trigger for the mode transition table. there is That is, in the present embodiment, the mode transition table can be updated every time 100 games are played, not only when transitioning to an advantageous section.

In the lottery trigger determination process according to the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79B, first, in step S3711, subtraction of the mode transition trigger counter set in step S3704 is executed. Then, in step S3712, it is determined whether or not the mode shift trigger counter has become zero. When it becomes 0, in step S3713, a process of setting a mode shift trigger flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S3714, after inputting 100 to the mode shift trigger counter, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If the mode shift trigger counter is not 0 at step S3712, it is determined at step S3715 whether the mode shift trigger counter is 5 or not. . If the mode shift trigger counter is 5, then in step S3716 the notification restriction command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. The notification restriction command will be described later in detail.

Now, returning to the description of the AT lottery process, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the mode shift trigger flag is set. If the mode change trigger flag is set, a process of clearing the mode change trigger flag is executed in step S3502. Then, in step S3503, lottery processing for the mode transition table is executed in the same manner as in step S3701. After that, in step S3504, the address information of the mode transition table is stored based on the processing result of step S3503, and in step S3505, the table command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or after the process of step S3505 is executed, the process of grasping the current mode transition table is executed in step S3506. Then, in step S3507, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is grasped, and in step S3508, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the first mode based on the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous interval AG. If it is the first mode, in step S3509, a process of acquiring the first AT mode transition lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed. If it is the second mode, various table storage areas are executed in step S3510. A process of acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table from 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table, the AT counter value for winning the AT mode transition lottery is determined according to the lottery result of each game. It is For example, in the first AT mode transition lottery table, if the game lottery result is normal reply A, if the AT counter is 128, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if the AT counter is 1 to 127, the AT mode transition lottery is not won. Become. Further, when the lottery result of the game is the second chance B, if the AT counter is 1 to 8, the AT mode shift lottery is won, and if the AT counter is 9 to 128, the lottery is not won.

On the other hand, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, the types of AT counter values associated with the lottery results of each game are set to be greater than in the first AT mode transition lottery table. ing. For example, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, if the lottery result of the game is normal reply A, the AT mode transition lottery is won not only if the AT counter is 128, but also if the AT counter is 1 to 4, and the AT counter is 5 to 127. If so, you will not be elected. When the lottery result of the game is chance B, the AT mode shift lottery is won not only when the AT counter is 1-8, but also when the AT counter is 9-64, and when the AT counter is 65-128, it is not won.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S3509 or step S3510, the lottery result of the game is grasped in step S3511, and in step S3512, the AT shifted to the execution area AE by the random number shift process. A process of acquiring information corresponding to the counter as random number information used for the current AT mode transition lottery is executed.

Then, in step S3513, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S3514, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is won. If winning, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S3515, and the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3516. The AT lottery process ends. If it is determined in step S3514 that the game has not been won, it is determined in step S3517 whether or not the lottery result of the game used for this AT mode transition lottery was a specific combination as a so-called rare combination. If it is a specific combination, in step S3518, after executing the process of setting the opportunity non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, this AT lottery process ends. If it is not a specific combination, the AT lottery processing is terminated as it is.

Next, processing on the side of the display control device 81 in this embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment, the processing configuration for notifying the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery and the processing configuration for executing the result notification effect of the AT mode transition lottery are different. Also, a processing configuration for notifying the AT counter to be acquired in advance as described above is added.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, in the start effect setting process in the present embodiment, the configuration for AT lottery mode notification processing (step S3808) and the configuration for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect (Steps S3809 to S3810) are different from the first embodiment, and in the present embodiment, after performing the process for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect, other At step S3811, a pending display process for notifying the pre-acquired AT counter is added before executing the effect setting process at the start (step S3812).

Further, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, in the effect setting process at the time of all stop in the present embodiment, the configuration of the lottery opportunity notification process (step S3905) and the configuration of the special notification process (step S3906) are the same as those described above. 1, and in this embodiment, after executing the processing for setting the AT end notification effect (step S3902) and the special notification processing (step S3906), other all-stop time effect setting processing Prior to executing (step S3908), in step S3907, pending shift processing is added to notify the pre-obtained AT counter.

<Processing for pending display>
First, the pending display process executed in step S3811 of the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If it is in the AT mode, the pending display process is terminated. If not in the AT mode, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not an AT command has been received. If the AT command has not been received, the hold display process is terminated. If the AT command has been received, the process advances to step S4003. As already explained, when an AT command is received, it is determined in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 73) on the main controller 101 side that the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state.

In step S4003, based on the information contained in the received AT command, the information of the AT counter corresponding to each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 is stored in the pending information storage area of the RAM 183. FIG. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, the holding information storage area on the display control device 81 side has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106g on the main control device 101 side, and is capable of storing data for 10 games (AT mode). Each memory area (1st storage area to 10th storage area) is provided to store AT counter information for 10 transition lotteries), and AT counter information for games targeted for AT mode transition lottery is stored. It has an execution area to store. In step S4003, based on the received AT command, the AT counter information in the first storage area RE1 on the main controller 101 side is stored in the first storage area of the pending information storage area, and the second storage area RE2 is stored. AT counter information is stored in the second storage area in the pending information storage area... AT counter information in the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area in the pending information storage area, and execution area AE AT counter information is stored in the execution area in the pending information storage area.

In subsequent step S4004, a hold display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether or not the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a display corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition opportunity.

Here, the pending display performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85( a ), a reserved display area Dr is set in the lower part as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display section 65 . The pending display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr10 as the maximum number of AT counters stored in the pending information storage area are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the reserved display area Dr includes a first unit reserved display area Dr1, a second unit reserved display area Dr2, a third unit reserved display area Dr3, a fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, and a fifth unit reserved display area. Dr5, a sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, a seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, an eighth unit reserved display area Dr8, a ninth unit reserved display area Dr9, and a tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 are set. In addition to the pending display area Dr, on the left side of the pending display area Dr (left side of the first unit pending display area Dr1), the pending display of the AT counter stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area is performed. An execution display area Dp is set for the purpose. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than the unit reservation display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the reservation display for the AT mode transition lottery of the game and the AT mode transition lottery after the game. A player can clearly distinguish this from the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), a first special image P1 to a sixth special image P6 are set as pending displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the pending display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 have a display mode corresponding to the value of the AT counter. If the AT counter is 8, the second special image P2 is displayed. If the AT counter is 9-64, the third special image P3 is displayed. If the AT counter is 65-94, the fourth special image P4 is displayed. If the counter is 95-127, the fifth special image P5 is displayed, and if the AT counter is 128, the sixth special image P6 is displayed.

These first to sixth special images P1 to P6 are set so that the displayed characters, colors, etc. are different so that the player can distinguish between them. In FIG. 85(a), the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit reserved display region Dr1, the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit reserved display region Dr3, and the eighth unit reserved display region Dr8 The sixth special image P6 is displayed, the first special image P1 is displayed in the ninth unit reserved display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE and the lottery result of the game. In this case, for example, if the game is a game in which the first special image P1 is displayed in the display area for execution Dp and the game is in the first mode, chance A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, and If it is one of the watermelons, the AT mode shift lottery will be won, and if it is not, the AT mode shift lottery will not be won (FIG. 81(a)). Further, for example, in a game in which the sixth special image P6 is displayed in the display area for execution Dp, and the game is in the second mode, normal description A to normal description C, chance eye C, cherry C, If it is either the common bell or the pressing order bell, it wins the AT mode shift lottery, and otherwise it does not win the AT mode shift lottery (FIG. 81(b)).

Returning to the description of the pending display process, the pending display lottery process performed in step S4004 is a pending display corresponding to the AT counter acquired this time among the AT commands received this time (basically, the tenth unit pending display area A lottery is made to determine whether or not to display the pending display corresponding to Dr10. As for the winning probability of such a lottery, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the display lottery is won with a probability of about 1/5 and the pending display is displayed. In this case, the winning probability is set so that the winning probability of the holding display lottery is larger than the reciprocal of the number of the plurality of unit holding display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the plurality of unit holding display areas Dr1 to Dr10 At least one (two in the above probability) is set as a probability that the pending display is displayed on average.

After executing the process of step S4004, it is determined whether or not the holding display lottery is won in step S4005. If the prize has not been won, the pending display processing is terminated as it is, and if the prize has been won, the process advances to step S4006. In step S4006, a process of reading from the ROM 182 the image data corresponding to the special image corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition opportunity is executed. Then, in step S4007, a process of displaying the special image corresponding to the read image data in the unit pending display area corresponding to the AT counter acquired at this acquisition opportunity is executed. More specifically, the AT counter acquired this time is stored in the empty area with the lowest number (basically the 10th storage area) among the empty areas of the holding information storage area, and the unit corresponding to the storage area. The auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so that a special image corresponding to the current AT counter is displayed in the reserved display area (basically the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10). After executing the process of step S4007, the pending display process ends.

<Processing for hold shift>
Next, the suspension shift processing for shifting the display area of the suspension display started as described above in accordance with the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from main controller 101. FIG. If the shift command has not been received, the pending shift process is terminated. As already explained, the shift command is a command output in the random number shift process when the number of bets in the lottery result handling process on the main controller 101 side is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state.

If the shift time command has been received, in step S4102, a process of clearing the pending display in the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, when a special image is displayed as a hold display in the display area for execution Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image, and the special image is displayed in the display area for execution Dp. If it is not displayed, it remains in that state. Then, in step S4103, a process of shifting the pending display of the first unit pending display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, when the reserved display of the special image is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1, the reserved display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the first unit reserved display area The auxiliary display part 65 is controlled to erase the pending display displayed in Dr1, and when the pending display is not displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1, that state is maintained. In subsequent step S4104, a process of shifting the pending display of each unit pending display area to a lower display area is performed. More specifically, the reserved display of the special image displayed in the second unit reserved display region Dr2 is displayed in the first unit reserved display region Dr1, and the reserved display displayed in the second unit reserved display region Dr2 is displayed. 3rd unit reserved display area Dr3 → 2nd unit reserved display area Dr2, 4th unit reserved display area Dr4 → 3rd unit reserved display area Dr3 ... 10th unit reserved display area Dr10 → 9th unit The reserved display of each unit reserved display area is shifted such as the reserved display area Dr9. In this case, as for the unit reserved display area in which the reserved display is not performed, the state in which the reserved display is not performed is shifted to the unit reserved display area on the lower side as it is. Then, only the pending display is shifted from the tenth unit pending display region Dr10 to the ninth unit pending display region Dr9, and no new pending display is shifted. That is, the pending display of the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 is cleared, and the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 is in a state where the pending display is not performed. If the shift command is not received in step S4101, or if the process of step S4104 is executed, this pending shift process ends.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and hold display>
How the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter obtained in advance will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.

In FIGS. 87(a1) and 87(b1), FIG. 87(a1) shows the holding display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display section 65 before the game starts (at the start). 87(b1) indicates a storage area RE and an execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106g. For example, the execution area AE stores "73" as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the execution display area Dp displays the fourth special image P4 as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter. In addition, as a random number used for the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, "35" is stored as information corresponding to the AT counter in the first storage area RE1, and the AT counter is stored in the first unit reserved display area Dr1. A third special image P3 is displayed as a hold display to be performed. In this situation, the case where the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game and the watermelon is won in the lottery process for the next game will be described.

When the number of bets for the current game is a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state, random number shift processing and pending shift processing are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41 . FIGS. 87(a2) and 87(b2) show a situation in which the AT counter information and hold display are shifted by one game from the situation of FIGS. 87(a1) and 87(b1). The AT counter information stored in the storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the third special image P3 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In addition, in FIGS. 87(a1) and 87(b2), the tenth storage area RE10 and the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 become free areas as a result of the random number shift processing and the reserved shift processing. showing.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information of the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE, the information of the lottery result of the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. As the AT mode transition lottery table, a low probability side first AT mode transition lottery table and a high probability side second AT mode transition lottery table are set. In this case, when the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter (35) shifted to the execution area AE of FIG. Winning in the AT mode transition lottery table (FIG. 81).

As described above, in the game in which the watermelon is won (the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is won), when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. can be established. The random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation, and in FIG. 88(b), the AT counter for the tenth storage area RE10 is acquired. By storing the AT counter in the tenth storage area RE10, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the sixth special image P6 can be displayed as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter.

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter obtained in advance, the pending display corresponding to the AT counter is performed, so that the lottery for the game that can win the AT mode transition lottery is performed. It is possible to advance the game after understanding the contents of the result in advance. Then, for example, a sixth special image P6 corresponding to a normal combination such as a common bell or a pressing order bell is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Dr3 as a reserved display corresponding to three games later. Depending on the situation, it is possible to play the three games with the hope that the normal role will be won after three games instead of after one or two games, and the fun of each game is greatly improved. do. In this case, when the sixth special image P6 is displayed as described above, only the normal combination corresponds to the AT mode transition winning in the low-probability first mode, but the high-probability second mode In the mode, in addition to the normal combination, Cherry C and Chance C also correspond to AT mode transition winning.

In particular, the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are displayed for normal roles such as normal reps A to C and push-order bell, which have a high winning probability in each game in a non-internal state or an internal state. In the first mode, any normal combination does not correspond to the AT mode transition win, but in the second mode, if the first special image P1 is the first special image P1, any normal combination wins the AT mode transition. In the case of the second special image P2, the pressing order bell of the normal combination corresponds to AT mode transition winning.

As already explained, as described above, the advance acquisition and shift of the AT counter are executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and if the bet number is not the specific prescribed number, the advance acquisition of the AT counter is performed. and shift execution are restricted. On the other hand, the first mode and the second mode in the present embodiment are defined by the number of games AG in the advantageous section, and the transition between the first mode and the second mode is based on the specific prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state. occurs whether or not That is, by playing the game in a restricted state with bets other than the specific prescribed number, it is possible to cause a transition between the first mode and the second mode while holding the AT counter acquired in advance.

That is, for example, the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are hold displays that are displayed when the AT counter value is 1 to 8, and are acquired with a probability of 8/128 and hold display. Since it is displayed when winning the lottery (50%), it can be said that its appearance rate is relatively lower than other special images. Then, if the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 can be accepted, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the second mode by the AT counter. There is an advantage in playing the game in a restricted state in which the shift of the AT counter is restricted until the shift of the AT counter is restricted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game feature is realized in which the player determines whether or not the game should be played in the restricted state in relation to the hold display.

<AT lottery mode notification processing>
FIG. 89(a) is a flowchart showing AT lottery mode notification processing in this embodiment.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not a table command has been received. As already explained, the table command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the mode transition table is updated in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 79) or the AT lottery process (FIG. 77). is. If the table command has been received, the process of storing the address information of the mode transition table in the address information storage area 183c is executed in step S4202. In the subsequent step S4203, a process of adding 1 to the table update counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The table update counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive times the mode transition table has been updated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In subsequent step S4204, a process of clearing the notification restriction flags provided in the various flags storage area 183a is executed.

The notification restriction flag is a flag for restricting the execution of the suggestive effect when performing the suggestive effect of the lottery mode. The notification restriction flag is set when the notification declaration command output from the main controller 101 when the mode shift trigger counter reaches 5 is received. That is, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in the present embodiment, in the all-stop effect setting process (step S1808), in the all-stop effect setting process, step S4211 is performed in the notification restriction process. is determined whether or not a notification restriction command has been received, and if received, a notification restriction flag is set in step S4212. When a negative determination is made in step S4211, or after the process of step S4212 is executed, the notification restriction process is terminated. Processing for restricting execution of the suggestion effect of the lottery mode when the notification restriction flag is set will be described later in detail. If the notification restriction flag is not set in step S4204, that state is maintained.

When a negative determination is made in step S4201, or after executing the process of step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4205, and it is determined whether or not the opportunity non-winning command has been received. As already explained, the opportunity non-winning command in the present embodiment is issued when the lottery result of the game used for the AT mode transition lottery is a specific combination and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. This is the command output from When the opportunity non-winning command is received, in step S4206, the process of adding 1 to the opportunity through counter is executed. The opportunity through counter in the present embodiment is a counter for the CPU 181 to ascertain the number of consecutive times that the AT mode shift lottery using the specific combination has not been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S4205, or after executing the process of step S4206, it is determined in step S4207 whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received. When the AT winning notification command is received, in step S4208, after executing the processing of clearing the table update counter and the opportunity through counter to 0, this AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated. If the AT winning notification command is not received in step S4207, the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Lottery opportunity notification processing>
In the lottery trigger notification process in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a process for notifying that the number of bets is in a limited state rather than a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state is executed. .

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-bet game. Determine whether or not If it is a 3-bet game and there is no first BB state or second BB state, the lottery opportunity informing process is terminated. On the other hand, even if it is a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, and if it is in the restricted state, in step S4303 the random number update restriction notification effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit. After executing the setting for performing by the 65 or the speaker 64, the lottery opportunity informing process is terminated. As the random number update restriction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), by displaying characters such as "HOLD!!" I do. In this embodiment, the random number update limit notification effect will be described as the same effect as the mode transition limit notification effect, but these effects may be different from each other, and at least each of them is in a restricted state. Any effect may be used as long as it allows the player to comprehend it.

<Special notification processing>
In the special notification process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 91, the address information storage area 183c is referenced in step S4401 to execute the process of grasping the current mode transition table. In the subsequent step S4402, a process of grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is executed based on the received advantageous interval game command. Then, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is the second mode. If it is the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4404, the effect setting for performing the effect for the first mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As the effect for the first mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the effect of displaying the main character on the auxiliary display section 65 is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be the second mode in step S4403, the second mode notification lottery process is executed in step S4405, and if the notification lottery is won (step S4406: YES), step At S4407, effect setting for performing the effect for the second mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As the effect for the second mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), a effect is set in which a flame flares up behind the main character in the auxiliary display section 65, and the main character's spirit is rising. there is

In other words, the player can know whether the current mode is the first mode or the second mode by the presence or absence of the flame behind the main character displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In the second mode notification lottery process in step S4405, the second mode notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the set value set in the winning probability setting process and the table update counter are grasped. Then, a lottery is made as to whether or not to execute the second mode effect in the current game. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the second mode notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the second mode notification lottery differs depending on the set value and the table update counter. Specifically, it is set such that the larger the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. In more detail about the setting value, with the odd setting, if the value of the table update counter is a predetermined value (2) or more, winning is easier than with the even setting, and with the even setting, if the value of the table update counter is less than the predetermined value It is set to make it easier to win than the odd number setting.

In the case of non-winning in the second mode notification lottery process of step S4405, the first mode effect setting process is performed in step S4404. It should be noted that the second mode effect may always be performed in the second mode without executing the second mode notification lottery process.

After executing the process of step S4404 or step S4407, it is determined in step S4408 whether or not the notification restriction flag is set. If the notification restriction flag is set and there are 5 games remaining until the mode transition table update game, and the mode transition table is not updated after that, the future The processing for special notification is terminated as it is without performing the processing for executing the mode prediction performance as the prediction performance of the lottery mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S4408, prediction notification lottery processing is executed in step S4409. In the predictive notification lottery process, the predictive notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the table update counter and the opportunity through counter are grasped to determine whether or not the mode prediction effect is executed in the current game. lottery. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the predictive notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the predictive notification lottery differs depending on the table update counter and the opportunity through counter. Specifically, it is set such that the larger the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the larger the value of the opportunity through counter, the easier it is to win.

In step S4410, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won in the lottery process of step S4409, and if not, the special notification process is terminated. If the lottery has been won, the process advances to step S4411, and by grasping the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous section AG, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode update trigger game is after a predetermined number of games (after 5 games). do. The update trigger game is a game in which the first mode is updated to the second mode or a game in which the second mode is updated to the first mode. It is a game in which two digits are 01, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 (Fig. 80). If the game after 5 games is not the update opportunity game, the special notification process is terminated. If it is the update trigger game, it is determined in step S4412 whether or not the mode will be updated to the second mode after 5 games by grasping the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous section AG. If the mode is updated to the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4413, after performing the effect setting for performing the first mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, End the process. As the first mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(b), an effect of displaying a candle character whose flame has gone out in an area different from the area where the main character is displayed in the auxiliary display section 65. is set.

If it is determined in step S4412 that the second mode is to be updated after the predetermined number of games, then in step S4414 the effect setting for performing the second mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. , the special notification process is terminated. As the second mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), there is an effect of displaying a burning candle character in an area different from the area where the main character is displayed in the auxiliary display section 65. is set.

<Game Flow and Hold Display>
The relationship between the flow of the game using the game in the restricted state and the hold display will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. FIG. 95 shows the flow of the game when the game is not played in the restricted state, and FIG. 96 shows the flow of the game when the game is played in the restricted state.

In FIG. 95(a), for example, the first special image P1 is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1, and the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Dr3 and the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5. 3 games including this game (the last two digits of the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG are 17 to 19) are in the first mode, and after the fourth game (the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG The last two digits are 20 to 29) indicate the second mode.

When such a situation is played in a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the lottery mode of the AT mode shift lottery shifts along with the count of the number of games AG in the advantageous section, and is stored in the lottery information storage area 106g. A shift in the current AT counter is also performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(b), when one game progresses from the situation of FIG. 95(a), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp. , and the game this time will be an AT mode transition lottery in the first mode. In this case, if the lottery result corresponding to the AT counters 1 to 4 corresponding to the first special image P1 in the first mode is a specific role winning as a so-called rare role, the AT mode transition lottery is won, but other If the result of the lottery is the lottery result of (1), the AT mode shift lottery will not be won.

When one game progresses from the situation in FIG. 95(b), as shown in FIG. 95(c), the first mode ends in this game, and the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode is performed from the next game. become. Then, when one game progresses further from the situation of FIG. 95(c), as shown in FIG. 96(d), the lottery for AT mode transition in the first mode starts from this game. The fifth special image P5 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the AT counter corresponding to the fifth special image P5 in the second mode is the chance C or cherry which is the lottery result corresponding to 95 to 127. If C is won, the AT mode shift lottery is won, but if other lottery results are obtained, the AT mode shift lottery is not won.

FIG. 96(a) shows the same situation as FIG. 95(a). However, in the situation shown in FIG. 96(a), the second mode prediction effect is being executed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 97(a), for example. In addition, in FIG. 97(a), the effect for the first mode is also executed in correspondence with the current lottery mode. Incidentally, in this figure, the special notification as the mode prediction notification after a predetermined number of games is shown as the mode prediction notification after three games. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery at the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 waiting for the next game is executed in the low probability first mode, and after the third game, the high probability first mode is executed. It is understood from these first mode effect and second mode predictive effect that there are two modes.

Therefore, FIG. 96(b) shows a case where one game has progressed in the restricted state after switching to a two-bet game. While progressing, the shift of the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is restricted. As a result, the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 in FIG. 96(a) is maintained in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 even if one game progresses. In this case, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the random number update limit notification effect is executed, and the player can grasp that the pending display is not shifted. However, since the current lottery mode is still the first mode, the main character is displayed without flames, and the effects for the first mode are being executed.

When one game progresses further in the restricted state from FIG. 96(b), as shown in FIG. 97(c), the first game is the first mode, and the next game is the second mode. However, since it is in the restricted state as described above, the AT counter is not shifted, and the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 is also not shifted. Further, when one game is advanced in the restricted state, the lottery mode becomes the second mode as shown in FIG. 97(d).

When the lottery mode becomes the second mode and, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the second mode of the game. executed.

Here, the effect for the second mode is configured to be executed when the player wins the second mode notification lottery process in the second mode. Therefore, when the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode, the effect for the second mode may not be performed in the game in which the mode shift occurs. Also, the second mode prediction effect is executed when the second mode is set after a predetermined game and when the prediction notification lottery is won. Therefore, the second mode prediction effect may not be performed in the game before the predetermined game to shift to the second mode. However, since the prediction notification lottery is executed regardless of the lottery mode after the predetermined game, if the prediction notification lottery is won, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the predetermined game is in the first mode or the second mode. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the notification is higher than that of the effects for the first mode and the effects for the second mode. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the second mode prediction effect occurs in the situation of FIG. In a game in which two digits are 22, the player can predict that the lottery mode is the second mode even if the second mode performance is not generated.

In other words, rather than trying to grasp the lottery mode by the first mode effect and the second mode effect, the player tries to grasp the lottery mode by counting the number of games starting from the game in which the second mode prediction effect occurs. A player who does so will be able to be sure of transitioning to the second mode in a faster game. Therefore, it is possible to further immerse the player in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the second mode prediction effect and ensuring the superiority of having a high degree of understanding of the game content and the effect content.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter obtained in advance and the game lottery result, and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery permits a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state. While a transition can occur in any of games and restricted games such as 2-bet games in non-internal states or internal states and BB states, the AT counter is updated (shifted, acquired) in permitted games. , AT counter is not updated in restricted games. By doing so, when the pre-acquired AT counter is given to the AT mode transition lottery, the AT counter update is restricted in the restricted game until the lottery mode becomes the second mode on the high probability side. It is possible to play a game such as In other words, as lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, there are a low probability side first mode and a high probability side second mode. (correspondence information) is defined, and until the AT counter acquired in advance becomes the correspondence information as the value of the AT counter that wins the AT mode transition win, the game is made to wait in the restricted game. By doing so, novel game such as deciding whether to proceed with the allowed game or the restricted game by using the relationship between the AT counter and the corresponding information acquired in advance. It becomes possible to realize

In this embodiment as well, in order to switch from the permitted game to the restricted game, it is sufficient to switch from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game or cause a BB win. By enabling switching to the restricted game, it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the AT mode shift lottery and the update of the AT counter are unintentionally restricted.

In this case, since the AT counter information obtained in advance can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a pending display, a decision is made as to whether or not to switch to the restricted game based on the content of the pending display. becomes possible. Moreover, by switching to the restricted game, random number update restriction notification performance is performed, and the shift itself of the hold display is also restricted, so that the fact that the restricted game is being performed can be more clearly grasped. By doing so, for example, when playing a game by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45, if the game is started by accident when two medals are inserted instead of three, the player may When the game is unintentionally switched to the restricted game as a two-bet game, it becomes easy to notice it, and the manager of the game hall can easily specify that the restricted game is being played.

Furthermore, as a special notification that suggests the current lottery mode, since it is configured to execute the first mode effect and the second mode effect, after grasping the current lottery mode, the AT counter acquired in advance can be predicted as corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode, and adjustment can be made between the restricted game and the permitted game.

As a special notification suggesting a future lottery mode, if there is a game in which the transition from the second mode to the first mode occurs after a predetermined number of games, a second mode prediction effect is executed, and after a predetermined number of games, the second mode is predicted. When there is a game in which the transition from the first mode to the second mode is present, the second mode prediction effect is executed. In this way, after grasping the lottery mode after a predetermined number of games, the AT counter obtained in advance predicts the game corresponding to the lottery mode, and the limited game and the allowed game are used. Adjustments can be made.

In this case, between the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode and the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode, the content of the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode matches the actual lottery mode. It is set so that there is a high possibility that the In other words, with regard to the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode, even if the effect for the first mode is performed, there is a possibility that the mode is the second mode. It may not be determined whether you are staying in the mode. On the other hand, regarding the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode, if the first mode prediction effect is performed, it is confirmed that the transition to the first mode will occur, and if the second mode prediction effect is performed, the second mode will be determined. It is determined that a mode transition will occur. Therefore, if it is attempted to specify the transition of the lottery mode in an earlier game, the first mode predictive effect or the second mode predictive effect is faster than the first mode effect or the second mode effect. higher contribution. By doing so, it is possible to suitably enhance the interest of the game in which the switching between the restricted game and the permitted game is performed by the advance acquisition of the AT counter and the prior understanding of the shift to the lottery mode.

Special notifications such as the first mode effect, the second mode effect, the first mode predictive effect, and the second mode predictive effect are all configured to be executed regardless of whether the game is permitted or restricted. It is possible to determine the timing of switching to the restricted game during the restricted game, and to determine the timing of switching to the permitted game during the restricted game.

In the above-described second embodiment, the occurrence rate of the special notification in the permitted game and the occurrence rate of the special notification in the restricted game are the same occurrence rate, but they may be different occurrence rates. However, it may be configured such that the special notification is more likely to occur than the allowable game. Since the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the restricted game, if the occurrence rate of the special notification is low, the consumption of the AT counter is restricted until the lottery mode becomes the desired lottery mode in the restricted game. In spite of this, there is a possibility of switching to the allowable game before the desired lottery mode becomes the desired lottery mode due to the desire to receive the AT mode shift lottery. In this regard, by increasing the occurrence rate of the special notification in the restricted game, it is possible to calm the player's impatient feeling and favorably perform the game in which the consumption of the AT counter is on standby until the desired lottery mode is reached. .

Since the present embodiment is configured to determine the lottery mode using the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the AT counter is set so as to win the AT mode transition for each lottery result of the game. It can also be said that the corresponding information as the value of is different depending on the number of games AG in the advantageous section. By doing so, for example, as in the first embodiment, when the player grasps the mode transition table this time from the table notification effect about the mode transition table, after the transition to the advantageous section occurs Considering the number of games after the update of the mode transition table and the number of games after the update of the mode transition table, it is possible to play restricted games up to a game in which the AT counter obtained in advance is likely to be corresponding information. In other words, it is possible to grasp whether or not the AT counter is likely to be the correspondence information from the AT counter and the number of games acquired in advance, and the game is played with the limited game until the game is likely to be the correspondence information. , it is possible to realize a novel game property.

Here, the number of games in the advantageous interval can be grasped by the presence or absence of the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator. It is difficult to grasp the number of games after the shift to the advantageous section because the display start game of the segment N8 does not match (the display starts when the AT mode is shifted). Therefore, as described above, the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section (the number of games after the setting of the mode transition table) and the relationship between the AT counter acquired in advance are used to determine the number of restricted games and the permitted number of games. It can be said that the configuration makes it difficult to understand the number of games itself when switching between games. By doing so, it becomes difficult to clearly specify at what timing the restricted game and the permitted game should be switched, and the interest of the game to determine the switching timing increases, and the special notification suggesting the lottery mode attracts attention. can also be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the mode transition table is updated every predetermined game (100 games) after transition to the advantageous section, even if a mode transition table unfavorable for the player is set, However, once the predetermined game is completed, there is a desire to update the mode transition table to a different mode transition table than the undesirable mode transition table. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

Here, the update of the mode transition table for each predetermined game is performed under the condition that the AT lottery process is a permitted game rather than a restricted game. By doing so, even if a restricted game is being played just because it is an undesirable mode transition table, if at least the mode transition table is to be updated, there is no need to switch to a permitted game. There will be By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid the situation where the game is played endlessly in the limited game and the total number of inserted medals decreases.

As the number of times the mode transition table is updated increases, the special notification indicating the lottery mode is more likely to occur. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the AT mode transition by promoting switching between the restricted game and the permitted game after grasping the lottery mode using the special notification, and the special notification is performed. It is possible to suitably realize the ceiling function that is used.

<Modification 1>
In this embodiment, the contents of the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table are different from those in the second embodiment. FIG. 99 shows each AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 99, when the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table are compared, the lottery results associated with AT counter values 1 to 4 and 5 to 8 are different. The lottery results associated with other AT counter values 9 to 128 are common. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99(a), in the first AT mode transition lottery table, if the AT counter value is between 1 and 4, the lottery result excluding duplicate 1-card hands, BB1, and BB2. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT counter value is 5 to 8, the AT mode transition lottery is won if it is a special combination. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), in the second AT mode transition lottery table, when the AT counter value is 1 to 4, the AT mode transition lottery is won for a specific combination. When the value of the AT counter is 5 to 8, if the result of the lottery excludes double 1-card role, BB1 and BB2, the AT mode shift lottery is won.

That is, in the present modification, although the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is common between the first mode and the second mode, in the first mode, it is easy to win when the AT counter value is 1 to 4, and in the second mode, the winning probability is the same. If the AT counter value is 5 to 8, it is easy to win. Therefore, although the probability of the AT counter value (corresponding information) that will win the AT mode transition lottery for the lottery result of the game differs depending on the lottery mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery for each game is the same. It means that Therefore, in terms of form, while not changing the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in each game, the AT counter obtained in advance, the lottery mode transition, and the switching between the restricted game and the allowed game are used. Therefore, it is possible to substantially change the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in each game.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 100(a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this modification. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is a process that is executed when all the reels are stopped in the reel control process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106g. If there is a vacant area and an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the processing for acquiring the AT counter is executed in steps S4502 to S4504, and then the random number acquisition processing ends. The processing of steps S4502 to S4504 is the same as the processing of steps S3204 to S3206. If there is no empty area and a negative determination is made in step S4501, the random number acquisition process ends.

As already explained, when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the game state, the random number shift process is executed at the start of the game, and basically the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area. A case where a negative determination is made in step S4501 means, for example, that the number of bets in a game started in a situation where information corresponding to the AT counter is stored in the tenth storage area RE10 is not a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state. Random number shift processing is not executed at the start of the game.

On the other hand, for example, if the information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored in the tenth storage area RE10, the number of bets in the started game is not a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. Yes, even if the random number shift process is not executed at the start of the game, an affirmative determination is made in step S4501.

As already described, in the slot machine 10, when the reset switch 72 is operated when the power is turned on and the winning probability setting process in the main process is executed, the RAM 106 is initialized. In this case, information corresponding to each AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is also cleared. That is, immediately after the winning probability setting process is performed, the AT counter is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106g, and the AT mode shift lottery is not performed at least for the first game.

On the other hand, with the above configuration, the game after the winning probability setting process is performed as a 2-bet game, so that the AT counter can be handled without digesting the information corresponding to the AT counter. It is possible to allow only acquisition of information. This makes it possible to quickly solve the situation where information corresponding to the AT counter in the lottery information storage area 106g is not stored.

Furthermore, when the RAM 106 is initialized, the 2nd BB winning flag can also be cleared, and when the normal game is executed in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over, several 2-bet games are executed. It is necessary to wait for the second BB election. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to acquire information corresponding to the AT counter even while waiting for the second BB winning, so it is possible to simplify the preparation work for the normal game. Become.

The situation in which the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is erased is not limited to the initialization process associated with the winning probability setting process. The configuration may be such that the AT counter is erased during the initialization process. Even in this case, taking advantage of the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section and the AT counter is not consumed, only the AT counter can be acquired and the AT counter can be accumulated.

FIG. 100(b) shows an allowable state in which the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state and execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted, a restricted state in which the number of bets is not a specific prescribed number, and an AT mode transition lottery. The relationship between the presence or absence of execution of each process to be performed is shown by comparing the situation immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106 and the situation before.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the first mode and the second mode as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery are defined by the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous section AG. It can transition to either a permissive state or a restricted state. The fact that such a shift to the lottery mode occurs in any state remains the same even immediately after the RAM 106 is initialized. However, since the advantageous section flag is cleared by the initialization of the RAM 106, the transition to the lottery mode occurs after the transition to the advantageous section.

On the other hand, the random number shift process, which is one process in the lottery result handling process, is executed in the allowable state but not executed in the restricted state. Then, regardless of whether or not the RAM 106 is immediately initialized, the random number shift process is similarly executed in the allowable state, but is not executed in the restricted state.

The random number acquisition process, which is one process in the reel control process, is executed in the allowable state, but not executed in the restricted state. However, if there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106g, such as immediately after the RAM 106 is initialized as described above, the processing for acquiring the AT counter in the random number acquisition processing is executed even in the restricted state. be. By doing so, it is possible to solve the situation where the information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored as described above.

Moreover, in the slot machine 10, the AT counter is updated in the timer update process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process. Executed with or without initialization. By doing so, even in the restricted state immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106, the AT counter can be acquired, but the acquired AT counter remains unupdated. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery results using the AT counter acquired in the relevant situation will not be the same result (either winning result or non-winning result). It is possible to prevent the hole from being unfairly disadvantaged.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the random number acquisition process for acquiring random numbers for a lottery related to the instruction function and the random number shift process for shifting the random numbers in accordance with the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, a lottery random number (AT counter) related to the instruction function is clearly distinguished from an AT game counter for the CPU 102 to determine the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is expressed as an AT random number.

<Various processing for AT random numbers>
FIG. 101(a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment, FIG. 101(b) is a flowchart showing random number shift processing in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of 106 g of information storage areas for lottery.

As already explained, the random number acquisition process is a process executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 72) (step S3117).

In the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, a process of acquiring an AT random number is performed in step S5001, and the AT random number acquired in step S5001 is stored in the reserved storage area RE in the lottery information storage area 106g in step S5002. Execute the process. Here, the lottery information storage area (FIG. 101(c)) in this embodiment is configured to be able to store AT random numbers for one game. That is, the configuration in which AT random numbers for a plurality of games are obtained in advance in the second embodiment is changed to a configuration in which AT random numbers for one game are obtained in advance.

Then, in step S5003, after executing a process of setting an AT command including the acquired AT random number information as an output target to the display control device 81, this random number acquisition process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the bet number is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, the process of acquiring the AT random number is executed.

Next, random number shift processing in this embodiment will be described.

Here, in the above-described second embodiment, the random number shift process is configured to be executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 75), but this embodiment changes it. do. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, in the lottery result handling process, before executing the process (steps S5102 to S5104) for determining whether the number of bets is a specified prescribed number, Then, random number shift processing is executed.

In the random number shift processing in this embodiment, in step S5011, the AT random numbers stored in the execution area AE are erased, and the AT random numbers stored in the reserved storage area RE are shifted to the execution area AE. do. Then, in step S5012, after executing a process of setting a shift command indicating that the shift process has been executed as an output target to the display control device 81, this random number shift process is executed.

<Lottery result handling process>
Next, lottery result handling processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102 .

In step S5101, the random number shift process is executed. After that, in steps S5102 to S5104, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state. That is, in step S5102, it is determined whether or not it is in any BB state, and if it is not in the BB state, in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". Also, if it is in any of the BB states, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the number of bets is "2". If the number of bets is not "3" in step S5103 or the number of bets is not "2" in step S5104, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If the number of bets is "3" in step S5103, or if the number of bets is "2" in step S5104, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the advantageous section shift lottery process is executed in step S5106, and then this lottery result corresponding process is terminated. Note that the advantageous section transition lottery process has already been described.

If the advantageous section flag is set in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5107. In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or any AT mode flag is set. If any flag is set, AT lottery processing is executed in step S5108. If neither flag is set, it is determined in step S5109 whether or not the first specialized zone flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. If not set, step S5110 is performed. , it is determined whether or not the second specialized zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the present embodiment, a first specialized zone and a second specialized zone are set in which an additional winning rate and the like are set high in the AT mode, and these first specialized zone flag and second specialized zone flag are This is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the corresponding specialized zone. If none of the specialized zone flags are set, AT addition processing is executed in step S5111, and if the second specialized zone flag is set and it is the second specialized zone, step In S5112, the processing for the second specialized zone is executed, and if the first specialized zone flag is set and the zone is the first specialized zone, the processing for the first specialized zone is executed in step S5113. . These first specialized zone processing and second specialized zone processing will be described later in detail.

<AT lottery process>
Here, the AT lottery process executed in step S5108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5201, a process of grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. Then, in steps S5202 to S5211, similarly to steps S802 to S811, processing relating to setting of the first mode and the second mode with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5206, or after the processing of step S5209 or step S5211 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5212. In step S5212, it is determined whether or not the first mode flag is set, and if the first mode flag is set, in step S5213, the first AT mode transition lottery table )) is executed. If the first mode flag is not set in step S5212 and the mode is the second mode, then in step S5214 a process for acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table (FIG. 81(b)) is executed. Run.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S5213 or step S5214, in step S5215, the process of acquiring the AT random number stored in the execution area AE is executed. Then, in step S5216, an AT mode transition lottery process is executed.

In step S5217, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and if the lottery has not been won, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, lottery processing for the number of precursor games is executed in step S5218. In the present embodiment, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the precursor mode. For example, the number of games of 1 from 0 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery, corresponding to the number of games in the precursor mode from 1 to 32 games. The number of precursor games is not limited to the above, and may include 33 games or more. In addition, the number of predictive games that are likely to be selected and the number of predictive games that are difficult to select or not selected may be set, and the number of predictive games with different selection rates is used to determine the lottery result of the game and the AT mode transition lottery mode (second 1 mode or 2nd mode).

In step S5219, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of precursor games determined in step S5218 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The omen counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the game in which the winning of the AT mode shift lottery should be notified, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, in step S5220, a process of setting a precursor command including information on the number of precursor games to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. After that, in step S5221, after executing the process of setting the AT mode winning flag, the AT lottery process ends.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S5111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this embodiment, the AT random number is used not only in the AT mode transition lottery but also in the processing for adding the AT mode.

In step S5301, the lottery result of the game is grasped. In the subsequent step S5302, a process of acquiring an AT random number from the execution area AE is executed. Then, in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the 1st AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, in step S5304, a process of acquiring the 1st AT add-on lottery table is executed. On the other hand, if the 1st AT mode flag is not set and the 2nd AT mode is set, then in step S5305 a process of acquiring the 2nd AT additional lottery table is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the 1st AT add-on lottery table and the 2nd AT add-on lottery table have different values of AT random numbers associated with the lottery results of the game for the add-on win. Specifically, as in the second embodiment, the AT random number is set to be any value between "1" and "128". It is set so that the lottery result of the game that becomes is different.

For example, in the first AT extra lottery table (Fig. 105), when the AT random number value is "1", the specific roles of chances A to C, cherries A to C, common bell and watermelon, and the normal reply It is set so that A to C and the order of pressing the bell will win additional prizes. In addition, when the AT random number value is "2" to "3", it is set so that the special role and the normal reps A to C are added to the prize. Then, when the AT random number value is "4" to "128", it is set so that the special combination is won as an additional win.

On the other hand, in the second AT extra lottery table (Fig. 106), when the AT random number value is "1" to "5", there are special hands, normal replies A to C, and pushing order bells. It is set so that it will be an additional winning. In addition, when the AT random number value is "6" to "18", it is set so that the special combination and the normal reps A to C are additionally won. Then, when the AT random number value is "19" to "128", it is set so that the special winning combination is won as an additional win.

That is, the second AT extra lottery table has more AT random numbers associated with the specific combination, normal reps A to C, and the pushing order bell than the first AT extra lottery table. is set. Also, the second AT extra lottery table is set so that the AT random numbers associated with the special combination and the normal reps A to C are larger than the first AT extra lottery table. On the other hand, the second AT additional lottery table is set so that the AT random number associated with the specific combination is smaller than the first AT additional lottery table.

In the following description, these special roles, normal reps A to C, and push-order bell will be referred to as the first corresponding role, the special role and normal reps A to C will be referred to as the second corresponding role, and the special role will be referred to as the second corresponding role. It is also called 3 corresponding roles. In addition, the AT random number associated with the first corresponding combination so as to win an additional win is also referred to as the random number in the first value band, and the AT random number associated with the second corresponding combination so as to win an additional win. is also referred to as a random number in the second value band, and the AT random number associated with the third corresponding combination so as to win an additional win is also referred to as a random number in the third value band.

As a lottery result of the game, in the normal game state, the first special role appears with a probability of about 85%, the second special role appears with a probability of about 17%, and the third special role appears with a probability of about 3%. do. In other words, if the AT random number obtained in advance is a random number in the first numerical range, there is a probability of about 85% of winning, and if the AT random number is in the second numerical range, there is a probability of about 17%. If the AT random number is a random number in the third numerical range, the probability of winning is about 3%. Therefore, the degree of addition expectation is highest when the pre-acquired AT random number is the random number in the first numerical range, and the lowest when it is the random number in the third numerical range. The probability (acquisition rate) of acquiring an AT random number in the first numerical band is about 0.8% in the first AT mode, and about 4% in the second AT mode. Since the range is set, the degree of addition expectation is higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In this embodiment, the number of games to be added in the event of an additional win differs depending on which AT random number wins. 10 games if you win with a random number in the 3rd range, 20 games if you win with a random number in the 3rd range. . It should be noted that the number of games to be added to each numerical range is not limited to the above, and other numbers may be used. good too. Also, the number of additional games may be set differently depending on which value in each numerical band the value is, or the number of additional games may be set differently depending on the lottery result of the game.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S5304 or step S5305, additional lottery processing is executed in step S5306. Then, in step S5307, it is determined whether or not an additional win has been made, and if the win has not been made, the present AT add-on processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, a set stock lottery process is executed in step S5308.

Here, an overview of the AT mode in this embodiment will be described.

The AT mode in this embodiment is a mode in which one set continues with at least 30 games. Otherwise, the AT mode ends. When winning the extra lottery in one set, the number of games in the set is added and the set stock lottery is carried out.

In the set stock lottery process of step S5308, the probability of winning the set stock lottery is set to differ according to the type of AT mode and the AT random number at the time of additional winning. If so, you will win the set stock lottery at 1.0% if you win with the AT random number in the first numerical range, and set stock at 1.0% if you win with the AT random number in the second numerical range. If you win the lottery and win the set stock lottery at 2.0% of the additional winning with the AT random number in the third numerical range. Also, if it is the 2nd AT mode, you will win the set stock lottery at 2.0% when you win with the AT random number in the first numerical range, and 2.0% when you win with the AT random number in the second numerical range. Win the set stock lottery with 0%, and win the set stock lottery with 3.0% of the additional winning with AT random numbers in the third numerical range. That is, not only is it easier to win the additional lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode, but it is also easier to win the set stock lottery that is performed when winning the additional lottery.

After performing the set stock lottery in step S5308, it is determined whether or not the set stock lottery is won in step S5309. If the set stock lottery is won, in step S5310 a process of adding 1 to the set counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of stocked sets. In the present embodiment, one set is stocked when the set stock lottery in step S5308 is won, but the number of sets to be stocked may be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of sets may differ according to the AT random number value at the time of winning or the lottery result of the game at the time of winning.

If it is determined in step S5309 that the set stock lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S5310 is executed, the processing of adding the number of additional games to the AT game counter is executed in step S5311. Then, in step S5312, a process of setting an add-on command including information such as the number of add-on games and the success or failure of the stock lottery as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

In subsequent step S5314, a second specialized zone transfer lottery process is executed.

An outline of the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone will now be described.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that when one set of the AT mode is started, a shift is made to the first specialized zone. As described above, the AT mode is configured so that a set with a minimum of 30 games can be played repeatedly, and the first special zone that shifts at the start of one set has a winning probability of winning a lottery that adds to the number of games in the AT mode. This is a zone for determining the number of games, which is set to be higher and determines the number of games in the set. On the other hand, the second specialized zone is a zone with a high probability of winning the set stock lottery, and shifts to the second specialized zone when winning the second specialized zone transfer lottery in the AT mode.

The second special zone transfer lottery is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the type of AT mode and the AT random number at the time of additional winning. 0.1% of the 2nd special zone transfer lottery will be won in the case of winning with an AT random number in the 1 value band, and 0.2% of the case of winning with an AT random number in the 2nd value band will be the 2nd. Winning the special zone transfer lottery and winning the second special zone transfer lottery at 0.3% of the additional winning with the AT random number in the third numerical range. Also, if it is the 2nd AT mode, you will win the second special zone transfer lottery with 0.3% of the extra winning with the AT random number in the first numerical range, and you will win the additional winning with the AT random number in the second numerical range. 0.5% of the case of winning the second special zone transfer lottery, and 1.0% of the additional winning with the AT random number in the third numerical range wins the second special zone transfer lottery. In other words, not only is it easier to win the add-on lottery and set stock lottery in the 2nd AT mode than in the 1st AT mode, but it is also easier to win the 2nd special zone transfer lottery that is performed when you win the add-on lottery. there is

After the second special zone transfer lottery is performed in step S5313, it is determined whether or not the second special zone transfer lottery is won in step S5314. If the player has not won the prize, the process for adding AT is terminated as it is. When winning, in step S5315, a process of setting a second special zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S5316, a process of inputting 10 to the second specialized zone counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The second special zone counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games played in the second special zone. In this embodiment, the second special zone is set to continue over 10 games. ing. After that, in step S5317, the second special zone command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT addition processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process, AT lottery process (step S5108), AT addition process (step S5111), second specialized zone process (step S5112), or first specialized zone process (step S5113) is executed, the process proceeds to step S5114. In step S5114, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If it is determined that the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S5115 whether or not any AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, it is determined in step S5116 whether the first specialized zone flag is set. If the first special zone flag is not set, in step S5117, processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winnings is performed, and in step S5118, the pressing order notifying command is displayed. After executing the process of setting as an output target to the control device 81, the lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pressing order bell is not won, or if none of the AT mode flags are set, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the pressing order notification process. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special zone flag is set even in the AT mode, and when the first special zone is in effect, the pressing order notification process is not performed. The lottery result handling process is ended.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result correspondence processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107 .

In step S5401, specialized zone count processing is executed. The specialized zone count process is a process for counting the number of games in the first and second specialized zones when completing a game, and for ending the first and second specialized zones. be. Specialized zone count processing will be described later in detail.

Steps S5402 to S5404 are processes for determining whether or not the number of bets is a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state. That is, in step S5402, it is determined whether or not it is in any of the BB states, and if it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the bet number is "3". If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the number of bets is "2". If the number of bets is not "3" at step S5403 or if the number of bets is not "2" at step S5404, the winning result handling process is terminated. If the bet number is "3" at step S5403 or if the bet number is "2" at step S5404, the process proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, it is determined whether or not the portent counter is greater than 0 and the player is in the portent mode after winning the AT mode transition lottery and before being informed of the winning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S5406. Then, in step S5407, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, AT start processing is executed in step S5408.

<AT start processing>
The AT start processing in step S5408 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5501, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, AT type determination processing is executed in step S5502. The AT type determination process is the same as the process in step S1004 described above. Then, in step S5503, it is determined whether or not the current AT mode is determined as the first AT mode, and if it is the first AT mode, in step S5504, a process of setting a first AT mode flag is executed. After that, in step S5505, processing for setting the first AT mode command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. On the other hand, if the second AT mode is determined, in step S5506 a process of setting the second AT mode flag is executed, and then in step S5507 a process of setting the second AT mode command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Run. The first AT mode command and the second AT mode command are commands for making the display control device 81 grasp the current AT mode type. The type of AT mode to be started is notified by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

After executing the process of step S5505 or step S5507, the process of inputting 30 to the AT game counter is executed in step S5508. Then, in step S5509, a process of setting the first special zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S5510, "10" is input to the first special zone counter provided in the various counter area 106e. Execute the processing to be performed. The first special zone counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the first special zone, and in this embodiment, the first special zone is set to continue over 10 games. ing. After that, in step S5511, the first special zone command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT start processing ends.

That is, in the AT start process, when the AT mode is started, the number of remaining AT mode games is set to 30 games, and the transition to the first specialized zone which is executed over 10 games is set.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S5405 or step S5407, or after the process of step S5408 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5409. In step S5409, it is determined whether any AT mode flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S5410 whether or not any specialized zone flag is set, and if none of the specialized zone flags is set, in step S5411 AT Decrease the game counter. That is, the process of subtracting the number of remaining games in the AT mode is not performed during the first special zone or the second special zone.

After executing the process of step S5411, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 in step S5412. If it becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the set counter is 0 in step S5413. If it is 0, the process for ending the AT mode is executed in steps S5414 to S5416, and if it is not 0, the process for starting the next set is executed in steps S5417 to S5421.

That is, in the process for ending the AT mode, the process of clearing the corresponding AT mode flag is executed in step S5414, and the process of setting the AT mode end flag is executed in step S5415. After that, in step S5416, after executing the process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is ended.

In the process for starting the next set, a process of subtracting 1 from the set counter is executed at step S5417, and a process of inputting 30 to the AT game counter is executed at step S5418. Then, in step S5419, a process of setting the first special zone flag is executed, and in step S5420, a process of inputting 10 to the first special zone counter is executed. After that, in step S5421, a process of setting the first special zone command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

<Specialized Zone Count Processing>
Next, the specialized zone counting process executed in step S5401 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the second specialized zone flag has been set and the vehicle is in the second specialized zone. If it is in the second special zone, in step S5602, a process of subtracting 1 from the second special zone counter is executed. Then, in step S5603, it is determined whether or not the second special zone counter has reached 0, and if it is not 0, the special zone count processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S5603 that the second specialization zone counter has reached 0, then in step S5604 the second specialization zone flag is cleared to end the second specialization zone. End the specialized zone count process.

If it is determined in step S5601 that it is not in the second specialized zone, the process advances to step S5605. In step S5605, it is determined whether or not the first specialized zone flag has been set and the vehicle is in the first specialized zone. If it is not in the first special zone, the special zone count process is terminated as it is. If it is in the first specialized zone, a process of determining whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state is performed in steps S5606 to S5608. That is, in step S5606, it is determined whether or not it is in any BB state, and if it is not in any BB state, it is determined in step S5607 whether or not the number of bets is "3". In addition, if it is in any of the BB states, it is determined in step S5608 whether or not the number of bets is "2". If the player is not in the BB state and the number of bets is not "3", or if the player is in the BB state and the number of bets is not "2", the specialized zone counting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the player is not in the BB state and the bet number is "3", or if the player is in the BB state and the bet number is "2", the process proceeds to step S5609.

In step S5609, a process of subtracting 1 from the first specialized zone counter is executed. Then, in step S5610, it is determined whether or not the first special zone counter has reached 0. If not, the special zone count process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first special zone counter has reached 0, the first special zone flag is cleared in step S5611, processing for ending the first special zone is executed, and then the special zone count is performed. End the process.

In other words, the second specialized zone is a zone in which the number of remaining games is counted when the game is completed, regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. On the other hand, in the first specialized zone, when the number of bets is a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state, the number of remaining games is counted at the end of the game, while the number of bets is determined according to the gaming state. This is a zone in which the number of remaining games is not counted if the number of remaining games is not the specified prescribed number.

<Processing for first specialized zone>
The processing for the first specialized zone executed in step S5113 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 102) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the first specialized zone is a specialized zone that is set at the start of one AT mode set, and is a zone for determining the number of games in the set.

In step S5701, processing for setting the digest command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, in the first specialized zone, when the number of bets on a game is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, the number of games is counted, but the number of bets is not the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. In that case, the game will not be counted. The case where the processing for the first specialized zone is performed is the case where the number of bets in the current game is a specific specified number corresponding to the gaming state (see FIG. 102), and the number of bets set in step S5701 is The command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the game in the first specialized zone has been completed with a specific prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state.

In the subsequent step S5702, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S5703, a process of acquiring the AT random number stored in the execution area AE is executed, and in step S5704, a process of acquiring the first special zone extra lottery table from the table storage area 105a is executed. Run.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the first special zone extra lottery table, AT random numbers with values from "1" to "51" are set as AT random numbers in the first numerical range associated with the first corresponding combination. , AT random numbers with values of "52" to "64" are set as AT random numbers in the second numerical range associated with the second corresponding combination, and AT random numbers with values of "65" to "128" is set as the AT random number in the third value range associated with the third corresponding combination. That is, in the first specialized zone, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range of "1" to "51", there is a probability of about 85% that the additional winning will be won, and "52" will be won. If the random number is in the 2nd numerical range from 64 to 64, there is a 17% chance of winning, and if the random number is in the 3rd numerical range from 65 to 128, there is a 3% chance of winning. becomes.

In the first specialized zone, the probability that the pre-acquired AT random number corresponds to the first numerical band is about 40%, and the probability that it corresponds to the second numerical band is about 10%; The probability that it corresponds to the third number band is about 50%. Therefore, the setting is such that the AT random number in the first numerical range is relatively easy to obtain. More specifically, with a probability of about 40%, an AT random number in the first numerical range is obtained, with a probability of about 60%, an AT random number other than the first numerical range is obtained, and less than half are ATs in the first numerical range. A random number will be obtained.

In step S5705, an additional lottery process is executed. Then, in step S5706, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. In the case of non-winning, the process for the first special zone is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, a process of adding the number of addition games to the AT game counter is executed in step S5707. In the present embodiment, if the AT random number in the first numerical range is won in the first specialized zone, an additional 5 games will be added, and the AT random number in the second numerical range will be added to the winning. It is set so that an extra 6 games will be added if it becomes true, and an extra 13 games will be added if the AT random number in the third numerical range is selected as an extra win. In step S5707, a value corresponding to the corresponding number of additional games is added to the AT game counter. After that, in step S5708, processing for setting the addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the processing for the first special zone ends.

<Processing for Second Specialized Zone>
Next, the processing for the second specialized zone executed in step S5112 in the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 102) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second specialized zone is a specialized zone that is set in part when winning the extra lottery in the extra process in the AT mode, and the probability of winning the set stock lottery is high. is a zone.

In step S5801, processing for setting a digestion command is executed in the same manner as in step S5701. The second specialized zone is a zone in which the number of games is counted regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and in the second specialized zone, the number of bets is The digest command is output regardless of whether or not it is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state.

In the subsequent step S5802, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S5803, a process of acquiring the AT random number stored in the execution area AE is executed, and in step S5804, a process of acquiring the second special zone extra lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. Run.

As shown in FIG. 113, the second special zone add-on lottery table is set with AT random numbers of values "1" to "17" as AT random numbers in the first numerical band associated with the first corresponding combination. AT random numbers with values of "18" to "64" are set as AT random numbers in the second numerical range associated with the second corresponding combination, and AT random numbers with values of "65" to "128" is set as the AT random number in the third value range associated with the third corresponding combination. That is, in the second specialized zone, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range of "1" to "17", there is a probability of about 85% of set stock winning (additional winning ), with a random number in the second range of numbers from "18" to "64" there is a 17% chance of winning the set stock, and a random number in the third range of "65" to "128" is about 3. 100% chance of winning set stock.

In the second specialized zone, the probability that the pre-acquired AT random number corresponds to the first numerical band is about 13%, and the probability that it corresponds to the second numerical band is about 37%; The probability that it corresponds to the third number band is about 50%. Therefore, the setting is such that it is relatively difficult to obtain an AT random number in the first numerical range. More specifically, an AT random number in the first numerical range is obtained with a probability of about 13%, and an AT random number outside the first numerical range is obtained with a probability of about 87%.

In step S5805, set stock lottery processing is executed. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether or not the set stock lottery has been won. In the case of non-winning, the process for the second specialized zone is terminated as it is. If the set stock lottery is won, a process of adding the stock number to the set counter is executed in step S5807. In this embodiment, if a set stock win is made with the AT random numbers in the first numerical range in the second specialized zone, one set of stock will be generated, and an additional winning will be made with the AT random numbers in the second numerical range. 1 set of stock will be generated if this is the case, and 5 sets of stock will be generated if the AT random number in the 3rd numerical range is selected as an additional win. In step S5807, a value corresponding to the corresponding stock number is added to the set counter. After that, in step S5808, processing for setting the addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the processing for the second special zone ends.

<Remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing>
Next, remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. These remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing are processing executed in steps S3605 and S3606 in the second section display processing (FIG. 78), and it is understood in advance that conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are satisfied. This is a process for

In the remaining game management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 114, in step S5901, the process of grasping the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is executed. Then, in step S5902, based on the set counter, a process of grasping the number of remaining sets is executed. In subsequent step S5903, a process of calculating the number of remaining AT mode games based on the number of remaining sets ascertained in step S5902 is performed. More specifically, the number of remaining AT mode games (G1) is calculated by multiplying the set counter (S) by the minimum number of games in one set (30 games).

In subsequent step S5904, a process of calculating the number of remaining games in the first specialized zone based on the set counter is performed. More specifically, by multiplying the set counter (S) by the minimum number of games (10 games) in the first specialized zone, the remaining number of games in the first specialized zone (G2) is calculated.

In subsequent step S5905, a process of calculating the number of remaining games in the second special zone is executed. In this process, the remaining number of games (G3) in the second special zone can be grasped by grasping the second special zone counter when the second special zone flag is set. In addition, in a configuration that can accumulate (stock) the second specialized zone that has not been executed multiple times, by multiplying the number of stocks by the minimum number of games in the second specialized zone, the remaining second specialized zone is calculated.

In the following step S5906, the number of remaining games (G4) of the current set is grasped from the AT game counter. Then, in step S5907, a process of calculating the current number of games to be completed in AT mode (GS) is executed. In this process, the number of games to be completed is calculated by adding the numbers of games grasped in steps S5901 to S5906. It should be noted that the processing of steps S5902 to S5906 has been described on the premise that after shifting to the AT mode. is equal to the number of games in the advantageous section AG.

In subsequent step S5908, it is determined whether or not the scheduled number of games to be completed (GS) is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section. Affirmative determination in step S5908 means that the upper limit number of games has already been reached even if the number of games in the AT mode is not increased or the set stock does not occur. In this case, in step S5909, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag indicates that the CPU 102 has already determined that the upper limit of the number of games will be reached even if the number of AT mode games is not increased or the set stock does not occur. is a flag for If a negative determination is made in step S5908, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5909, the remaining game number management process ends. If the scheduled number of games to be completed is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games and the first excess flag is not set, the first excess flag is set in step S5910, and the first excess command is displayed in step S5911. After executing the process of setting as an output target to the control device 81, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 115, in step S6001, a process for grasping the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed. Then, in step S6002, the number of remaining games in AT mode (G1+G4) is multiplied by the expected increase/decrease number per game in AT mode (in this embodiment, about plus 6.00) to obtain the expected number of AT games. The increase/decrease number of sheets (M1) is calculated.

In the following step S6003, by multiplying the remaining number of games (G2) in the first specialized zone by the expected increase/decrease in the number of cards per game in the first specialized zone (approximately minus 1.77 in this embodiment), Calculate the expected increase/decrease number of sheets (M2) in the first specialized zone. Then, in step S6004, the number of remaining games in the second specialized zone (G3) is multiplied by the expected increase/decrease in the number of cards per game in the second specialized zone (approximately plus 6.00 in this embodiment). , the expected increase/decrease number of sheets (M3) in the second specialized zone is calculated. Thereafter, in step S6005, a process of calculating the current AT mode scheduled increase/decrease number of sheets (MS) is executed. In this processing, the planned increase/decrease in the number of sheets is calculated by adding the respective number of sheets ascertained in steps S6001 to S6004.

In the subsequent step S6006, it is determined whether or not the planned increase/decrease number of sheets (MS) is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase of the number of sheets (2400) of the advantageous section. The affirmative determination in step S6006 means that there is a high possibility that the upper limit increase will already be reached even if the number of games in the AT mode is not increased or the set stock does not occur. In this case, in step S6007, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second excess flag is set so that the CPU 102 can understand that it has already determined that there is a high possibility that the upper limit increase will be reached even if the number of games in the AT mode is not increased or the set stock does not occur. flag. If a negative determination is made in step S6006, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S6007, the remaining number management processing ends. If the planned increase/decrease in the number of sheets is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase in the number of sheets and the second excess flag is not set, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed in step S6008, and the second excess command is displayed and controlled in step S6009. After executing the process of setting the number of games to be output to the device 81, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting processing on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 116 .

In step S6101, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is a win in the first place. In the case of winning the pressing order, on the condition that the pressing order notification command is received (step S6102: YES), the process of setting the pressing order notification effect for the 1st to 6th minor roles is performed ( step S6103).

Here, as described above, in the AT mode, basically, the pushing order notification command is output when the pushing order is won. However, in the first special zone at the start of one set in the AT mode, no push order notification command is output even if the push order is won. In other words, even in the AT mode, the number of medals in the first specialized zone cannot be expected to increase, and the number of medals may decrease (approximately minus 1.77 medals per game).

If it is not the first win, it is determined in step S6104 whether or not the special win is won.If the special win is won, the process of setting the special win notification effect is performed in step S6105.

If a negative determination is made in step S6102 or step S6104, or if the processing in step S603 or step S6105 has been executed, the process advances to step S6106. In step S6106, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. In this embodiment, if any of the excess flags is set on the main control device 101 side, the effect in the subsequent AT mode may be rewritten to the ending effect until forced termination, and such an ending flag is set to the ending effect. This is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the status has been rewritten. By the way, by performing the ending effect, the player understands that the set of the AT mode and the first special zone will be repeated until the forced end, that is, there is a set stock until the forced end. Furthermore, it is understood that there is no point in adding more AT mode games or sets. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the ending effect is being performed, the execution of the additional effect is restricted.

That is, if the ending flag is not set in step S6106, it is checked in step S6107 whether or not an additional command has been received. Under the condition that there is none among them (step S6108: NO), an additional effect is set in step S6109. In subsequent step S6110, a specializing first process, which is one process for the specializing zone, is executed. The first processing for specialization will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when the ending flag is set, even if the addition command is received outside the specialization zone, the setting of the addition effect and the first processing for specialization are not performed. . By the way, the first specialized flag and the second specialized flag that are set in the various flag storage area 183a when each specialized zone command is received are used to determine whether or not it is in the specialized zone. be.

When the ending flag is set, or after executing the first processing for specialization, other start effect setting processing is executed in step S6111, and then this start effect setting processing is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117 .

In step S6201, it is determined whether or not an advantageous interval game command has been received and the game is in an advantageous interval. If the game is in the advantageous section, it is determined in step S6202 whether or not the first AT mode command has been received. Also, in step S6204, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode command has been received. As already explained, the first AT mode command and the second AT mode command are commands output when the AT type determination processing on the main controller 101 side is performed. When the 1st AT mode command is received, the process which sets 1st AT start information production|presentation is performed in step S6203. Further, when the second AT mode command is received, the process of setting the second AT start notification effect is executed in step S6205. The first AT start notification effect is an effect for letting the player know that the AT mode to be started from now on is the first AT mode, and the second AT start notification effect is to make the AT mode to be started from now on be the second AT mode. This is an effect for making the player grasp something. It should be noted that, as in each of the above-described embodiments, along with each AT start notification effect, the rotation effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be executed.

If neither the first AT mode command nor the second AT mode command has been received, it is determined in step S6206 whether or not the AT end command has been received. If the AT end command has been received, in step S6207 the process of setting the AT end notification effect is executed.

After executing the processing in step S6203, step S6205, or step S6207, or if a negative determination is made in step S6206, the process proceeds to step S6208. In step S6208, it is determined whether a first excess command or a second excess command has been received. If any excess command has been received, in step S6209, a process of setting an excess flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed.

In subsequent step S6210, an ending lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute an ending effect. In such a lottery process, for example, the winning probability may be set according to the number of games remaining until forced termination or the number of remaining increased numbers. The winning probability may be set so as to facilitate winning. Also, the winning probability of the ending lottery may be set according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. good too.

After executing the ending lottery process in step S6210, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won in step S6211. When winning, the ending effect setting process is executed in step S6212. Then, in step S6213, processing for setting an ending flag is executed. Incidentally, when the ending flag is set, the ending effect is continued until the end of this advantageous section. As described above, when the ending flag is set, the execution of the additional effect and the setting of the effect in the special zone are not performed.

If it is determined in step S6208 that no overrun command has been received in the current game, it is determined in step S6214 whether or not the overrun flag has been set and the overrun command has already been received. If the excess flag is set, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in step S6215, and if the ending flag is not set, excess notification lottery processing is executed in step S6216. The excessive notification lottery process is a specific situation in which the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increased number of sheets is reached even if the number of AT mode games is not added or the set stock does not occur, and it is not notified as an ending effect. , a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute an excess notification effect as a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific situation is present. In the excess notification lottery, for example, each game in the specific situation is set to win with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). In addition, in each game in a situation other than the specific situation, it is preferable that the excess notification effect is generated so that the occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate in the specific situation.

After executing the excess notification lottery process in step S6216, it is determined whether or not the excess notification lottery is won in step S6217. Effect setting is performed so that the excess notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display part 65 or the like. As the excess notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 126, an excess notification image EDP corresponding to the specific situation is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

If a negative determination is made in step S6211, step S6214 or step S6217, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6215, or after executing the process of step S6213 or step S6218, the process proceeds to step S6219. In step S6219, a special second process, which is one process for the special zone, is executed. The second processing for specialization will be described later in detail.

When a negative determination is made in step S6201, or after the process of step S6219 is executed, other effect setting process at all stop is executed at step S6220, and then the effect setting process at all stop ends.

<First processing for specialization>
Next, the first processing for specialization performed in step S6110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not a first special zone command has been received. If the first specialization zone command has been received, processing for setting the first specialization flag is executed in step S6302. If the first zone specialization command has not been received, it is determined in step S6303 whether the second zone specialization command has been received. If a second specialization zone command has been received, processing for setting a second specialization flag is executed in step S6304. After setting one of the specialization flags in step S6302 or step S6304, in step S6305, the processing of inputting 10 to the specialization counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed, and then the specialization flag is executed. 1 End the process. The specialized counter is a counter for notifying the number of remaining games in the specialized zone. The number of remaining games in the special zone is displayed in a number-of-games image GP such as "8 games remaining" in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG.

If no special zone command has been received, it is determined in step S6306 whether any special flag is set and a special zone command has already been received. If any specialized flags are set, in step S6307 it is determined whether a digest command has been received. As already explained, in the first specialized zone, the digest command is output when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, while in the second specialized zone, the number of bets is equal to the number of bets in the gaming state. A digestion command is output regardless of whether or not there is a specific prescribed number according to the request.

If the digest command has been received, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the add command has been received. If the add-on command has been received, in step S6309 setting processing for performing the add-on effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like is performed. In addition, since the number of AT mode games can be added in the first specialized zone, as an additional effect, "+5 games" is notified as shown in FIG. Since the set stock of the mode can be performed, it is preferable to notify "+1 set" as an additional effect.

On the other hand, if the add-on command has not been received, in step S6310, a setting process is performed so that the disappointment effect (FIG. 121(b2)) is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. By the way, if the number of bets on the second special zone exceeds the specified number of bets according to the gaming state, the number of games played in the second special zone will be counted, but the set stock lottery will not be held. Absent. Therefore, although the digestion command is output, the additional command is not output, and the disappointment effect is always executed.

After performing either effect setting processing in step S6309 or step S6310, processing for subtracting 1 from the special counter is executed in step S6311. Then, in step S6312, the display of the number of remaining games in the specialization zone is updated in accordance with the subtraction of the specialization counter. In the subsequent step S6313, it is determined whether or not the specialization counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step S6314 setting is made so that the specialization zone end effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After executing the processing, the first processing for this specialization ends.

On the other hand, if the redemption command has not been received in step S6307 and the first specialized zone has been redeemed with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, the process proceeds to step S6315. As mentioned above, if the number of bets on the first special zone is different from the specified number according to the gaming state, the number of games in the first special zone will also be counted, although the additional lottery will not be held. can't break That is, in this case, the consumption of the first specialized zone is avoided for one game. Therefore, in step S6315, a setting process is executed so that the avoidance effect (FIG. 121(b3)) corresponding to the first special zone being avoided by one game is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. do. After that, the first processing for specialization ends.

Incidentally, when the extra effect or disappointing effect is performed as described above, the display of the number of remaining games in the specialized zone is updated by subtracting one game (FIGS. 121(b1) and 121(b2)). On the other hand, when the avoidance effect is performed, the display of the number of remaining games in the specialized zone is not updated (Fig. 121 (b3)). Also from this, the player can clearly grasp that the consumption of the first specialized zone has been avoided for one game.

<Second processing for specialization>
Next, the second processing for specialization performed in step S6219 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not an AT command has been received. As already explained, the AT command is a command output when an AT random number is obtained in the random number obtaining process. If an AT command has been received, in step S6402, a process of storing an AT random number corresponding to the received AT command in the reserved storage area corresponding to the reserved storage area RE on the main controller 101 side is executed. Incidentally, the AT random numbers stored in the reserved storage area are AT random numbers used for the AT mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, and the set stock lottery of the next game.

If a negative determination is made in step S6401, or if the processing of step S6402 has been executed, it is determined in step S6403 whether or not any specialized flag has been set. If none of the specialization flags are set, the specialization second processing is terminated. If any special flag is set, the process advances to step S6404 to perform processing for grasping the AT random number stored in the reserved storage area. Then, in step S6405, the process of acquiring the notification type table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S6406, the notification type of the specific notification suggesting the AT random number used for the additional lottery of the next game is grasped. process.

The notification type table, as shown in FIG. 120(a), may be an AT random number in the first numerical band associated with the first corresponding combination that will be an additional winning in the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone. For example, the first specific notification is likely to be selected, and if the AT random number is in the second numerical range associated with the second corresponding combination, the second specific notification is likely to be selected, and the third numerical value associated with the third corresponding combination. If the AT random number is in the band, it is set so that the third specific notification is likely to be selected. In other words, the first specific notification is a notification indicating that if the lottery result of the next game is the first corresponding combination, the player will win an additional winning or the like, and the second specific notification is the notification that the lottery result of the next game is the second corresponding combination. The third specific notification is a notification suggesting that if the lottery result of the next game is the third corresponding combination, the additional winning will be obtained. The effect contents of these first to third specific notifications are set so that the player can clearly identify them. For example, in the first specific notification, as shown in FIG. The energetic face of the main character is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display section 65, and in the second specific notification, the normal main character's face is close-up on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 121(a2). , and in the third specific notification, the depressed face of the main character is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 121(a3).

In more detail about the notification type table, in the second specialized zone, the first specific notification is always selected if the AT random number is in the first numerical range, and the second specific notification is always selected if the AT random number is in the second numerical range. is selected, and if the AT random number is in the third numerical range, the third specific notification is always selected.

On the other hand, in the first special zone, if the AT random number in the first numerical band is "1" to "30", the first specific notification is selected, but if it is "31" to "40" If there is, the second specific notification is selected, if it is "41" to "51", the third specific notification is selected, and even if it is the first numerical range, the second specific notification or the third specific notification can be selected. It has become. Also, if the AT random number in the second numerical band is "55" to "60", the second specific notification is selected, but if it is "52" to "54", the first specific notification is selected. If it is 61" to "64", the third specific notification is selected, and even if it is the second numerical range, the first specific notification or the third specific notification can be selected. Then, if the AT random number in the third numerical band is "85" to "128", the third specific notification is selected, but if it is "65" to "74", the first specific notification is selected. If it is 75" to "84", the second specific notification is selected, and even if it is in the third numerical range, the first specific notification or the second specific notification can be selected.

By the way, the CPU 181 can determine which numerical range the AT random number corresponds to by the value of the AT random number and the special flag that is set.

After grasping the notification type in step S6406, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific notification in step S6407, and if it is the first specific notification, the first specific notification is assisted in step S6408. After executing the setting process to be performed on the display unit 65 or the like, the special second process ends. If it is not the first specific notification, it is determined whether or not it is the second specific notification in step S6409, and if it is the second specific notification, in step S6410, the second specific notification is the auxiliary display unit After executing the setting process to be performed in 65 or the like, the second specialization process is terminated. Then, if it is not the second specific notification, in step S6411, setting processing is executed so that the third specific notification is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and then the special second processing is executed. finish.

<How the first and second specialized zones are held>
Regarding how the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone are performed, refer to the overview table of the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone in FIG. 120(b) and the timing charts in FIGS. Description will be made with reference to this.

As described above, the first specialized zone is a specialized zone that is shifted to at the start of one AT mode set, and is a specialized zone for determining the number of AT mode games in one set. In the first specialized zone, the winning probability of the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is higher than in other states, and continues over 10 games. The AT mode game number addition lottery is executed based on the AT random number obtained in the previous game and the lottery result in the game, and the AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range and the lottery result is the first. If it is a corresponding role, it will be an additional win, and if the AT random number is a random number in the second numerical range and the lottery result is the second corresponding role, it will be an additional winning, and if the AT random number is a random number in the third numerical range and the lottery If the result is the 3rd corresponding combination, the additional win is won. As a lottery result of the game, the second counterpart is more likely to be won than the third counterpart, and the first counterpart is more likely to be won than the second counterpart, and there is a possibility of becoming the first counterpart. set to be the highest. In other words, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range, it can be expected that the additional winning will be won with a high probability.

In the present embodiment, in the first specialized zone, a specific notification suggesting the pre-acquired AT random number information is performed. Moreover, when the first special zone is played with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, the number of games in the first special zone is not counted, although the extra lottery is not performed. Also, acquisition and shift of AT random numbers are executed regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number. In other words, the player predicts whether or not the pre-obtained AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range, and aims for a case where the AT random number in the first numerical range is obtained. By playing the game with the number of bets, it is possible to enjoy the profit of winning with a high probability.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, if a game that starts at timing 1a and ends at timing 1b is the first game in the first specialized zone, the first game is the specific prescribed number of bets. In the case of (3 bet), the AT random number obtained at the end timing (-1b) one game before the game is used for the extra lottery of the first game. In addition, the AT random number obtained at the end timing (1b) of the first game is used for the additional lottery of the second game of the first specialized zone. However, the figure shows the case where the second game is completed with a bet number (2 bets) other than the specific prescribed number. In this case, the random number shift process is performed at the start of the second game (2a). Therefore, although the random number acquisition process is performed at the end (2b), the additional lottery process is not performed at the start of the second game. Also, in this case, the number of games played in the first specialized zone is not counted. In the figure, after moving to the first specialized zone, the 2nd, 3rd, 6th to 9th, 10th, and 11th games are completed with a bet number other than the specified prescribed number. In fact, it took 15 games to complete the first specialized zone.

Here, in the first specialized zone, execution of the pressing order notification is restricted even if the AT mode flag is set. In other words, when the push order bell is won, the push order corresponding to the 1st to 6th small wins is not reported, and in a 3-bet game, about 1.77 medals are lost per game, and in a 2-bet game, the loss is about 1.77 medals per game. If this is the case, the situation is such that approximately 0.64 medals can be lost per game. In the present embodiment, the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range is 40%, and the first specialized zone among 10 games is specified only for games in which AT random numbers in the first numerical range have been obtained. Assuming that the game is played with numbers, it takes about 25 games on average to complete the first specialized zone. In other words, if only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range are consumed, an average loss of about 27.3 medals (1.77×10 games+0.64×15 games) can occur.

On the other hand, the number of games to be added when winning using the AT random numbers in the first numerical range is 5 games, as shown in FIG. Considering that the probability that the lottery result of the game will be the first corresponding hand is about 85%, the expected number of additional games when only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range are consumed in the first special zone is about 42. 7 games (5 games x 85% x 10 games). Given that the expected number of medals to be acquired per game in the AT mode is about 6.00, the expected number of medals to be acquired is 256.2 when the expected number of additional games is consumed in the AT mode. (42.7 games x 6.00), which is more than the above medal loss, and an increase of about 228.9 medals can be expected. In other words, it is advantageous for the player to consume only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range for the first specialized zone.

Incidentally, the loss of medals when all the first specialized zones are consumed by 3-bet games is about 17.7 medals (1.77 medals×10 games). In addition, the expected number of additional games when not only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range but also the AT random numbers in the other numerical ranges are consumed is about 20.1 games, and when this expected additional number of games is consumed in the AT mode. The expected number of medals to be won is 120.6, and an increase of about 102.9 medals can be expected. In other words, although it is advantageous for the player to complete all the first specialized zones in the 3-bet game, the expected number of medals to be acquired increases when only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range are completed.

In the following description, a game in which the number of bets of a specific specified number and the number of bets other than the specific specified number are switched and only the AT random numbers in the first value range are consumed is called an advantageous game, and the number of bets is switched. A game in which AT random numbers in each numerical band are digested is also called a normal game.

On the other hand, the second specialized zone is a specialized zone that shifts to a part of the additional wins in AT mode, and the number of games where the probability of winning the set stock lottery is higher than in other states is 10 games. It is a zone that continues throughout. The set stock lottery is executed based on the AT random numbers obtained in the previous game and the lottery results in the current game, in the same way as the above-mentioned additional lottery. If is the first corresponding hand, set stock will be won, and if the AT random number is a random number in the second numerical range and the lottery result is the second corresponding hand, the set stock will be won, and the AT random number will be a random number in the third numerical range. And if the lottery result is the 3rd corresponding combination, the set stock will be won. In other words, as in the first specialized zone, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first numerical range, it can be expected that the set stock winning will be highly probable.

In the present embodiment, the specific notification suggesting the pre-acquired AT random number information is also performed in the second specialized zone. However, if the second special zone is played with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number, the set stock lottery will not be performed. Unlike the case of the specialized zone, the number of games played in the second specialized zone is counted even when a game is played with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. In other words, in the second specialized zone, as in the advantageous game described above, even if you try to switch between the specific prescribed number of bets and the other than the specific prescribed number of bets and try to consume only the AT random numbers in the first numerical range, A game with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number leads to consumption of the number of games in the second specialized zone, making it impossible to receive benefits from the second specialized zone.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, if the game that starts at timing 1a and ends at timing 1b is the first game in the second specialized zone, the first game is the specific prescribed number of bets. (3 bet), the AT random number acquired at the end timing (-1b) one game before the game is used for the set stock lottery of the first game. Also, the AT random number obtained at the end timing (1b) of the first game is used for the set stock lottery of the second game of the second specialized zone, which is also the same as the first specialized zone. . On the other hand, the figure shows a case in which the second game is completed with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number (2 bets). Not only is the set stock lottery process not executed at the start of the second game, but the number of games played in the second specialized zone is counted. In the figure, after moving to the second special zone, the 2nd game, the 3rd game, and the 5th game are completed with the number of bets other than the specific prescribed number. It shows that the benefits of the transformation zone could not be received for only 3 games. That is, in the second special zone, regardless of the type of specific notification, playing the normal game is more advantageous for the player than playing the advantageous game.

<About the degree of advantage when the first special zone is digested in a normal game with an advantageous game>
The advantages when the first special zone is played in the normal game and in the advantageous game will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 and 125, (a1) and (b1) indicate normal games, and (a2) and (b2) indicate advantageous games.

As shown in FIG. 124, after one set of ta1 to ta2 AT mode is executed, when the transition is made to the first specialized zone, in the normal game, it is pressed over the interval from ta2 to ta3 (between 10 games). A first specialized zone with no forward reporting is run. On the other hand, in the advantageous game, the first specialized zone is executed in which the pressing order information is not performed over the period from ta2 to ta4 (between about 25 games), and the medal loss is more advantageous than the normal game. becomes more frequent. On the other hand, the AT mode of the next set in the normal game is between ta3 and ta5 (about 50 games, the number of initial games is 30, and the number of additional games is about 20), while the AT mode of the next set in the advantageous game is ta4. to ta7 (approximately 73 games, 30 initial games, and approximately 43 additional games), and the medal increase in the AT mode is greater in the advantageous game than in the normal game. Similarly, although the first specialized zone from ta7 to ta9 in the advantageous game has a higher medal loss than the first specialized zone from ta5 to ta6 in the normal game, the AT from ta6 to ta8 in the normal game More medals increase in the AT mode from ta9 to ta10 in the advantageous game than in the mode. Thus, it is basically more advantageous for the player to complete the first specialized zone in the advantageous game than in the normal game.

Here, in this embodiment, the medal loss (27.3 = 1.77 × 10 games + 0.64 × 15 games) when the first specialized zone is digested in the advantageous game, the The acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range ( 40%) is set. In addition, the difference between the medal loss when the first specialized zone is consumed in advantageous games and the medal increase in the number of additional games is the medal when the first specialized zone is consumed in normal games. The acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range is set so as to be larger than the difference between the lost amount and the increased amount of medals in the number of additional games.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the amount of medals increased by the number of additional games when the advantageous game is played is larger than the medal loss when the first specialized zone is consumed by the advantageous game. , an expected increase in the number of coins per game in the AT mode is set. In addition, the difference between the medal loss when the first specialized zone is consumed in advantageous games and the medal increase in the number of additional games is the medal when the first specialized zone is consumed in normal games. The expected increase in the number of medals per game in the AT mode is set so as to be larger than the difference between the loss amount and the increase in medals due to the number of additional games.

By the way, the average number of games when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous games is the number of games in the first specialized zone (10 games) divided by the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range (40%). It is calculated by In addition, by multiplying the average number of games when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous games by the expected increase or decrease in the number of bets, the number of games when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous games is calculated. Medal loss is calculated. Then, the expected number of additional games when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous games is the winning probability of the additional lottery using the AT random number in the first numerical range, the number of additional games per game, and the first specialized zone. Calculated by multiplying by the number of games in the zone. In other words, the lower the acquisition rate of the AT random numbers in the first numerical range, the greater the average number of games when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous games. In that case, the medal loss in the first specialized zone will increase, and in order to secure the superiority of advantageous games, the number of additional games in the first value band will be increased, or the number of games per game in AT mode will increase. It is necessary to increase the expected increase in the number of coins, or to increase the expected increase/decrease in the number of bets when the first specialized zone is completed with an advantageous game. In addition, as the expected increase in the number of sheets per game in AT mode decreases, in order to secure the superiority of advantageous games, the number of additional games in the first value band is increased, or the acquisition rate of the first value band is increased. It is necessary to increase the number of bets and increase the expected increase/decrease in the number of bets (decrease the decrease).

If each parameter such as the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range and the expected increase in the number of sheets per game in AT mode has the above relationship, the first specialized zone will be consumed in an advantageous game. There is an advantage of this, and it is possible to realize a novel game property such as receiving an additional lottery only for a desired game by using the specific notification.

However, for example, in a situation where a large amount of set stock is generated due to the second specialized zone, etc., and the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section or the upper limit of the number of increased numbers is likely to be reached even if there is no addition or set stock, etc. It is more advantageous for the player to complete the 1 special zone in the normal game than in the advantageous game. This situation will be described with reference to FIG.

After one set of the AT mode from tb1 to tb2 is executed, when the transition is made to the first specialized zone, in the normal game, the pressing order is not notified over the period from tb2 to tb3 (for 10 games). 1 specialized zone is implemented. On the other hand, in the advantageous game, the first special zone in which the pressing order information is not performed is executed over the period from tb2 to tb4 (about 25 games), and the medal loss is more advantageous than the normal game. becomes more frequent. On the other hand, the AT mode of the next set in the normal game is between tb3 and tb5 (about 50 games, the number of initial games is 30 games, and about 20 additional games), while the AT mode of the next set in the advantageous game is tb4. to tb7 (approximately 73 games, 30 initial games, and approximately 43 additional games), and the medal increment in the AT mode is greater in the advantageous game than in the normal game. Similarly, the first specialized zone from tb7 to tb9 in the advantageous game has a higher medal loss than the first specialized zone from tb5 to tb6 in the normal game, but the AT from tb6 to tb8 in the normal game More medals increase in the AT mode from tb9 to tb13 in advantageous games than in the mode. The flow up to this point is the same as in FIG. 124 above.

As described above, FIG. 125 shows a situation in which the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase in the number of games in the advantageous section are likely to be reached even if no addition or set stock occurs. This indicates the case where it is certain that the That is, in the normal game, after the AT mode ends at tb8, further, the first specialized zone at tb8 to tb10, the AT mode at tb10 to tb12, the first specialized zone at tb12 to tb14, and the first specialized zone from tb14 to tb14. AT mode is executed at tb16. Further, in the advantageous game, after the AT mode ends at tb13, the first specialized zone is executed at tb13 to tb15, and the AT mode is executed at tb15 to tb16. In this case, the number of games played in the first special zone is smaller in the normal game than in the advantageous game, and the medal loss in the first special zone is smaller. The total medal increase number is larger in the normal game than in the advantageous game. In other words, in such a situation where there is a large number of AT mode stocks and it is certain that the upper limit number of games will be reached, the first specialized zone can be used in a normal game rather than in an advantageous game. Digestion is advantageous for the player.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when the AT mode ends in a situation where there is no set stock, the AT mode end flag is set and the advantageous section ends. Also, as described above, when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase in the number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends as it is even if AT mode or the like remains. Assuming that the period until the end of the advantageous section is a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. By playing games with a large number of games, it is possible to increase the proportion of the AT mode in the predetermined period until the end of the advantageous section, which is advantageous. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, the situation in which it is more advantageous to complete the first specialized zone in the normal game is to reduce the number of games in the first specialized zone than in the case of performing the advantageous game. By playing the game, it is possible to increase the proportion of the AT mode in the predetermined period until the end of the advantageous section, which is advantageous. In other words, in this embodiment, there are situations in which it is advantageous to increase the number of games played in the first specialized zone, and situations in which it is advantageous to reduce the number of games played in the first specialized zone. It is set as follows, and it is possible to realize a novel game property such as playing the opposite game while judging which situation it is.

To explain the relationship with the effect on the auxiliary display section 65, as described above, even if the number of games in the AT mode is not increased or the set stock does not occur, the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase in the number of games is reached. , in a specific situation where it is not notified as an ending effect, an excess notification image EDP can be displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 as an excess notification effect (FIG. 126(a)). In this case, for example, in the first specialized zone, as shown in FIG. If the notification image EDP is not displayed, the game is played with 2 bets other than the specific prescribed number to avoid the additional lottery with the AT random number in the third value range, and the third specific notification is made as shown in FIG. 126 (b2) is performed and the excess notification image EDP is displayed, the player makes a judgment that the game is played with a specific prescribed number of 3 bets and an additional lottery is performed with AT random numbers in the third value range. becomes possible.

Here, in the present embodiment, the excess notification effect is configured to be executed not only when the upper limit number of games is reached, but also when the upper limit increase number is likely to be reached. In other words, in a situation where it is certain that the maximum number of games will be reached, the final number of acquired medals will be greater if the first specialized zone is used in normal games rather than in advantageous games. , In a situation where the upper limit increase number is likely to be reached, even if the first specialized zone is consumed in a normal game instead of an advantageous game, the final number of acquired medals is the upper limit increase number, and in any game It doesn't change even if you digest 1 specialized zone. However, even if the upper limit increase number is finally reached, the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is greater when the first special zone is used in normal games than when the first special zone is used in advantageous games. is reduced, and the normal game is more advantageous for the player from the viewpoint of time efficiency. Therefore, when the excessive notification effect is performed, it is advantageous for the player to complete the first special zone in the normal game regardless of the forced termination condition, and the game is not complicated. It is possible to suggest a game that is advantageous to the player without causing any trouble.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Using the AT random number obtained in advance and the lottery result of the game, an extra lottery for the number of games in the AT mode and a set stock lottery are performed, and in a situation where the excess flag is not set, the first specialized zone It is more advantageous for the player to consume in an advantageous game that avoids the execution of the extra lottery according to the AT random number acquired in advance, and in the situation where the excess flag is set, the first special zone is set to the AT random number. In spite of this, it is advantageous for the player to consume the lottery in a normal game that permits the execution of the extra lottery. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game feature such as determining which game should be used to complete the first special zone. In this case, the decision depends on whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, so the set stock that occurred before that time is used as a basis for the decision. By doing this, it draws attention not only to whether or not a set stock has occurred, but also to the cumulative number of set stocks, the relationship with the number of games played in the advantageous section, etc. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Since the specific notification corresponding to the pre-acquired AT random number is configured, it is possible to determine whether or not to avoid the execution of the additional lottery in the first specialized zone through the specific notification. .

When the excess flag is set, an excess notification effect can be performed in each game, so even if the number of set stocks, etc. cannot be determined, the first special zone can be played advantageously by the excess notification effect. It is possible to judge whether or not to digest with.

The excess notification performance can be executed in a situation where the ending performance is not performed. In the situation where the ending effect is being performed, even if an additional effect occurs, the additional notification effect etc. will not be executed, and since the player knows that the upper limit of the advantageous section will be reached, the first specialized zone The player can easily determine that there is no point in consuming in an advantageous game. Therefore, in such a situation, since the excess notification effect is not performed, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of overlapping the ending effect and the excess notification effect, and it will be difficult to see. It is possible to fully enjoy the ending production.

Even if the first special zone is played with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number, the number of games in the first special zone is not counted. By doing so, it is possible to avoid encroaching on the number of games in the first specialized zone by avoiding the execution of the additional lottery with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number in the first specialized zone. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to play the avoidance game with peace of mind.

In the first special zone, even if the AT mode flag is set, the additional notification is not performed. Therefore, even if the first specialized zone is consumed in an advantageous game, an increase in medals in the first specialized zone cannot be expected. Therefore, whether or not to avoid the additional lottery in the advantageous game can be determined also from the balance with the reduction of medals, the interest of the game to be avoided can be improved, and the first special zone can be used as the advantageous game. Digestion at .

In a situation where the excess flag is not set, if the number of games played in the first specialized zone tends to increase with advantageous games, it is possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in a predetermined period until the end of the advantageous section. Furthermore, in a situation where the excess flag is set, the number of games played in the first specialized zone tends to be less than in the case of advantageous games. It is possible to increase the proportion of the mode. In other words, by increasing or decreasing the number of games played in the first specialized zone, it becomes possible to increase the ratio of the AT mode during the predetermined period. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as completing the first specialized zone after judging whether or not to play.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, as the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, if it is known in advance that the upper limit number of games will be reached and if it is known in advance that the upper limit increase number will be reached, the ending effect and the excess The execution rate of the notification effect is different. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the all-stop effect setting process in this modified example.

Steps S6501 to S6507 are the same as the above steps S6201 to S6207. In step S6508, it is determined whether or not the first excess command has been received. If the first excess command has been received and it is known that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached, then in step S6509 the first excess flag is set in the flag storage area 183a. . Then, in steps S6510 to S6513, processing for the ending effect is executed. On the other hand, if the second excess command is received instead of the first excess command (step S6514: YES), a process for setting a second excess flag is executed in step S6515, and an ending effect process is executed. does not run.

That is, in this modification, when it is grasped in advance that the upper limit number of games is reached, the ending effect can be started, but when it is grasped in advance that the upper limit increase number is reached, the ending effect is not performed. not started. This is because, as described above, depending on the game contents of the first specialized zone, a large number of medals may be lost, and even if the ending effect is started, the number of medals may be reduced to the upper limit. This is due to consideration of the possibility that the target will not be achieved. By doing so, it is possible to prevent contradiction between the execution of the ending effect and the presence/absence of forced termination.

If the second overage command has not been received, it is determined in step S6516 whether any overage flags are set. If any excess flag is set, on condition that the ending effect is not performed (step S6517: NO), an excess notification lottery process is executed (step S6518).

In the excess notification lottery process in this modified example, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the excess notification based on the excess notification table shown in FIG. 128 . In the excess notification table, it is easier to win the excess notification lottery when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set, and both excess flags are set. The case is set so that it is most likely to win the excess notification lottery. That is, for example, even when it is determined that the upper limit increase number is reached, the excess notification effect may not be executed, and the possibility is higher than when it is determined that the upper limit number of games is reached. Therefore, if the first specialized zone is completed without switching the bet number, the upper limit increase should have been reached, but due to medal loss caused by switching the bet number, the upper limit increase cannot be reached becomes more likely to occur. By doing so, interest in the set stock number and the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is increased, and while predicting whether the upper limit increase number will be reached, the bet number switching game in the first specialized zone can be performed, and it is possible to greatly improve the amusement of the game.

In the effect setting process at the time of all stop, when the excess notification lottery is won (step S6519: YES), the excess notification effect setting process is performed in step S6520. Further, after the processing of step S6513, step S6515, or step S6520 is executed, if affirmative determination is made in step S6517, or if negative determination is made in step S6512 or step S6519, the second processing for specialization is performed in step S6521. to run. The processing of steps S6521 and S6522 is the same as the processing of steps S6219 and S6220.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the excess notification table used for the excess notification lottery is different from that of the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of an excess notification table in this modified example.

In this modification, the lottery result of the game and the setting value set in the winning probability setting process are set as parameters in the excess notification table. That is, with regard to the chance numbers A to C, basically, the game of the chance number B is more likely to cause the excess notification effect than the chance number A, and the chance number C is more likely to occur in the game of the chance number B than the chance number B. The notification effect is set to occur more easily, and the setting is such that the excessive notification effect is more likely to occur as the lottery result of the game is less likely to be won. In addition, in relation to the set values, the even number setting is set so that the excess notification effect is more likely to occur triggered by the chance eyes A to C than the odd number setting.

In a game in which Cherry A is reached, the excess notification effect does not occur when the setting is 3 or less, but occurs when the setting is 4 or more. On the other hand, in the game of Cherry B, the excess notification effect occurs only at the setting of 3 or less, and does not occur at the setting of 4 or more. In the game of Cherry C, regardless of the setting value, the excess notification effect is uniformly generated with a probability of 30%.

In addition, the excess notification performance triggered by watermelon is more likely to occur with odd number setting than even number setting, and the excess notification performance triggered by pushing order bell is more likely to occur with even number setting than with odd number setting.

As already explained, if the lottery result of the game is a specific role called a so-called rare role, it is set so that it is easy to win the extra lottery or the set stock lottery. A game with a lower probability of a lottery result is more likely to generate an excessive notification effect. By doing so, even if there are enough remaining games and stock to reach the upper limit, winning the specific role will not be wasted, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. becomes. More specifically, if there are enough remaining games and stocks to reach the upper limit, it is meaningless to win the specific role and generate extra games or set stocks. Therefore, if the excess notification effect is generated as described above, the player can enjoy the fact that there is no need to wastefully play in the first specialized zone as a benefit instead of adding the number of games or set stock. It becomes possible.

In addition, by providing a setting difference in the excess notification lottery, even in a situation where it is known that the upper limit will be reached, it is possible to guess the setting value, and the interest of the game is improved. .

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the situation in which the excess notification effect can be performed is different from that in the third embodiment and the like. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the all-stop effect setting process in this modified example.

The difference in the effect setting process at the time of all stop in this modification is that before executing the excess notification lottery process (step S6617), the presence or absence of the first specialized flag is confirmed, and if it is in the first specialized zone The point is that the processing for excess notification effect (steps S6617 to S6619) is not performed.

That is, even in a situation where the excess flag is set and it is understood that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is reached, in the first specialized zone, the excess notification effect of that situation is performed. does not occur. By doing so, before reaching the first specialized zone, it is determined whether or not an advantageous game should be performed when reaching the first specialized zone, and in the first specialized zone, from each specific notification By providing a place of interest in each game, such as reconsidering whether or not to play an advantageous game while judging the winning rate of the additional lottery, it is difficult to cause confusion for the player, and the fun of the game is improved. It is possible to draw out as much as possible.

It should be noted that although the configuration is such that the excess notification effect does not occur in the first special zone, it is not limited to the configuration in which it does not occur completely, and the probability of winning the excess notification lottery in the first special zone The winning probability of the excess notification lottery outside the special zone is lower than the probability of winning, and the excess notification production in the first specialized zone is more likely to affect the player than the excess notification production outside the first specialized zone. Any configuration that restricts the excess notification effect in the first specialized zone, such as making it difficult to visually recognize, may be used.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the correspondence between the AT random number and the specific notification is different from that in the third embodiment and the like. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second processing for specialization in this modified example.

In this modification, in steps S6701 and S6702, similarly to steps S6401 and S6402, processing for storing the AT random number of the received AT command in the reserved storage area is performed. In the subsequent step S6703, it is determined whether or not any specialization flag is set. If any special flag is set, in step S6704, the AT random number in the reserved storage area is acquired, and in step S6705, it is determined whether or not the AT random number is the AT random number in the first numerical range. make a judgment. If it is an AT random number in the first numerical range, then in step S6706 the process for performing the first specific notification is executed, and then the special second process ends. On the other hand, if the AT random number is not in the first numerical range, it is determined in step S6707 whether or not the excess flag is set.

If the excess flag is set, that is, if the situation is such that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or the upper limit increase number will be reached even if there is no addition or set stock, etc., the addition lottery for the next game Even if the AT random number given to the set stock lottery is not the random number in the first value band, the process proceeds to step S6706 to execute the process for performing the first specific notification. That is, in this case, the first specific notification corresponding to the AT random number in the first numerical range is executed even if the AT random number is in the second numerical range or the third numerical range. By doing this, in a situation where the upper limit of the number of games or the upper limit of the number of increased numbers in the advantageous section is likely to be reached even if there is no addition or set stock, etc., AT random numbers in the second and third value bands Even if there is, the player will play the game with the specific prescribed number of bets without hesitation. Therefore, in this situation, it becomes easier for the player's profit to be secured.

If the excess flag is not set, it is determined in step S6708 whether or not the AT random number is in the second numerical range. If it is an AT random number in the second numerical band, a pseudo notification lottery is executed in step S6709. Pseudo notification lottery is an AT random number in the first numerical range if the AT random number is in the second numerical range, even if it is not in a situation where the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or the upper limit increase in the number of sheets is likely to be reached. This is a lottery for simulating the corresponding first specific notification. As shown in FIG. 132, the pseudo-notification lottery is set so that a part of the second numerical band ("52" to "57") can be won. The type of is different depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. More specifically, the odd number setting makes it easier to win the pseudo notification lottery than the even number setting. On the other hand, in the even setting, it is set so that if the number is "52" to "54" in the second numerical range, the pseudo notification lottery is won.

After executing the pseudo notification lottery in step S6709, it is determined whether or not the pseudo notification lottery has been won in step S6710. After executing the setting process, the special second process ends. On the other hand, if the pseudo notification lottery is not won, the setting process for performing the second specific notification is executed in step S6711, and then the special second process is terminated. If it is determined in step S6708 that the AT random number is not in the second numerical range but in the third numerical range, then in step S6712 setting processing for performing the third specific notification is performed, and then this special notification is executed. Terminate the second processing for conversion.

As described above, according to this modification, when the excess flag is set, even if the AT random number is not in the first numerical band but in the second numerical band or the third numerical band, Since the first specific notification corresponding to the AT random number is performed, the first specific notification can be trusted and it can be expected that the first specialized zone will be consumed as it is. Therefore, by using the specific notification, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the consumption of the first specialized zone should be avoided, and allow the situation in which it should be allowed.

In this case, since the first specific notification may be performed even if the AT random number is in the second numerical range when the pseudo notification lottery is won from the normal time, the first specific notification is performed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the additional winning is not won in spite of winning the first special combination.

When the excess flag is set, the first specific notification is always performed even if the AT random number is in the second numerical band or the third numerical band, and when the excess flag is not set, the pseudo notification By winning the lottery, the first specific notification is performed even if the AT random number is in the second numerical range. That is, the probability that the first specific notification is performed when the AT random number is in the second numerical range is higher when the excess flag is set than when the excess flag is not set, and the excess flag is set In the scene where it is not performed, the reliability of the first specific notification is ensured to some extent. Precisely because of such a configuration, it is possible to successfully prompt the player to play with the specific prescribed number of bets by performing the first specific notification when the excess flag is set.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, an example will be described in which the number of games to be added when winning in the first special zone is changed according to the lottery result of the game. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of the additional lottery table for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

In this modified example, even if the lottery result of the game is the same when the additional winning is won, the number of additional games is set to be different according to the value of the AT random number. Even if the value of is the same, the number of additional games is set to differ according to the lottery result of the game.

For example, in the event that an additional win is made in chances A to C, 35 games will be added if the AT random number is in the first numerical range, whereas 23 games will be added if the AT random number is in the second numerical range. If the game is an AT random number in the third numerical band, 13 games are added. In addition, in the case where the AT random number in the first value range is added to the winning lottery, if the game lottery result is the chance number A to C, 35 games are added as described above, whereas cherry A to There are 35 games for C, 50 games for common bells, 35 games for watermelons, and 4 games for normal replies A to C and push-order bells.

By doing so, even if an additional lottery is performed with the AT random number in the first numerical range by playing an advantageous game, the lottery result of the game greatly affects the number of additional games. To dramatically improve interest in profitable games.

In addition, even if the lottery result of a game in which an additional lottery is performed using an AT random number in the first numerical range is the first corresponding combination, when the specific combination (third corresponding combination) is won, the additional lottery result is higher than the other results. Since it is set to be a number, it is possible to make it difficult for players to feel dissatisfaction that they cannot or hardly feel the merit of winning the special role.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described third embodiment, the playability of advancing the first specialized zone or avoiding the progression according to the pre-obtained AT random number has been described. Criteria for advancing or avoiding progression of specialization zones are different. Specifically, in this modification, the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is involved in the additional lottery in the AT mode, and if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is in the first numerical range, there is a high probability that the additional lottery will be won. If the number of games AG in the advantageous section is in the second or third numerical range, the odds of winning the additional lottery are lower than in the case of the first numerical range.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the processing for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

In step S6801, processing for setting a digest command is executed. Also, in step S6802, processing for grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. The processes of steps S6801 and S6802 are the same as the processes of steps S5701 and S5702 described above.

In the subsequent step S6803, a process of grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous section is executed. Then, in step S6804, a process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the first specialized zone from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 135, in the first special zone extra lottery table in this modified example, the value of the number of advantageous section games AG for extra winning is set according to the lottery result of the game. Specifically, if the value of the number of games AG in the advantageous section is the first numerical range and the last digit is any of 1, 3, 5, and 7, the first corresponding combination will be won as an additional win, and the second combination will be won. If the last digit of the number band is 9, the second corresponding combination will be won as an additional win, and if the last digit of the third number band is 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8, it will be won. It is set so that if it is the third corresponding combination, it will be an additional win.

Then, in step S6805, the addition lottery process is executed, and if the addition is won (step S6806: YES), the number of addition games is added to the AT game counter in step S6807, and the addition command is added in step S6808. Execute the process to set . The processes of steps S6805 to S6808 are the same as the processes of steps S5705 to S5708.

Although detailed explanation with drawings is omitted, it is preferable that the specific notification in this modification is made in correspondence with the value of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG instead of the value of the AT random number. Specifically, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is in the first numerical range, the first specific notification is executed, and if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is in the second numerical range, the second specific notification is executed, and the advantageous interval game is executed. If the number AG is in the third numerical range, the third specific notification may be executed.

In this way, the information used for the additional lottery in the first specialized zone is not limited to the lottery result of the game and the AT random number, but whether it is a specific prescribed number of bets such as the number of games in the advantageous section AG. Any information that can be updated regardless of whether the In other words, a lottery that uses at least updated information regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, and is allowed to be executed if the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, but is other than the specified prescribed number. In the case of a lottery whose execution is limited if the number of bets is 1, the gaming property of waiting until the updated information becomes the desired information by betting other than the specific prescribed number is realized. In this case, the probability that the information to be updated becomes the desired information is higher in the number of games added when the advantageous game is played than the medal loss when the first specialized zone is consumed in the advantageous game. It suffices if the medal increment is set to be larger. Then, the probability that the updated information becomes the desired information is the difference between the medal loss amount when the first specialized zone is consumed in advantageous games and the medal increase amount in the number of additional games. It may be set to be larger than the difference between the medal loss in the case where one specialized zone is consumed in normal games and the medal increase in the number of additional games.

In the modified example above, the number of games AG in the first to third numerical bands are set as discontinuous values. , 4 in the last digit is the second numerical band, and 5 to 9 in the last digit is in the third numerical band. In this case, if the number of games in the advantageous zone AG of the games that move to the first specialized zone is the beginning of the first numerical band (the last digit is 0) or is close to it, the end of the first numerical band (the last digit is 1 It is more advantageous to the player than if the digit is 3) or close to it. More specifically, when playing a game that avoids the additional lottery until the number of games AG in the advantageous interval when moving to the first specialized zone reaches the number of games AG in the advantageous interval in the first numerical range, the number of bets other than the specific prescribed number The amount of medals lost by digesting will now be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not to shift to the first specialized zone, but also in the transition game to the first specialized zone, thereby greatly improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the mechanism of the additional lottery in the first specialized zone is different from that of the third embodiment, etc., and in the first specialized zone, the lottery result of the game is the result to be added. , and if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is a predetermined specific operation mode, an addition occurs, and even if the lottery result of the game is an additional target result, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the specific operation mode. If the operation mode is different from the operation mode, the number of games is added less than in the case of the specific operation mode. Also, the first specialized zone is configured to end when the games that result in additional results are completed a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 136 shows the processing for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

At step S6901, a digest command is set, and at step S6902, processing for grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. Then, in step S6903, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is one of the normal replies A to C as the result to be added. If it is not the normal reply A to C, the process for the first specialized zone is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of normal replies A to C, in step S6904, a process of setting an addition target flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S6905, an addition target command is output to the display control device 81. After executing the process of setting as , the process for the first specialized zone ends. The add-on target flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery result of the current game is the add-on target result in the first specialized zone. Further, the add-on target command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the lottery result of the current game is the add-on target result in the first specialized zone.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing specialized zone count processing in this modified example.

Steps S7001 to S7004 are the same as the processing in steps S5501 to S5504 described above, and are processing for the second specialized zone. In step S7005, it is determined whether or not the first special zone flag is set.

If it is in the first special zone, the above-mentioned add-on target flag is set in step S7006, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reps A to C. If it is not the normal reply A to C, the specialized zone count processing is terminated as it is. In other words, when it is not normal Lips A to C, the addition processing is not performed in the first specialized zone, and the counting of the first specialized zone is not performed.

If it is a normal reply A to C, in step S7007 the addition target flag is cleared. determine whether More specifically, when the normal reps A to C are won, the "replay" symbol on the middle of the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the top of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" on the top of the right reel 32R. When the symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol stops, the first replay prize included in the normal replies A to C is established, but in this embodiment, the left reel 32L When the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "replay" symbol reaches the middle row of the , and the first replay winning prize is established, it is determined that the specific operation mode has been performed. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L has been operated in the reel control process (FIG. 22) (step S403), in the sliding number calculation process (step S407), the first replay It is preferable to store information indicating that the specific operation mode has been performed when the sliding number for establishing a prize is calculated as 0, and to determine whether or not the information exists in step S7008.

In the case of the specific operation mode, in step S7009, the number of additional games this time is greater than the specified number of additional games (for example, 4 games) (for example, 6 games, which is 1.5 times the specified number of additional games). , and adds a value corresponding to the number of games to the AT game counter. On the other hand, if it is not the specific operation mode, in step S7010, the current number of additional games is set as the specified number of additional games, and the value corresponding to the number of games is added to the AT game counter. Then, after executing the process of step S7009 or step S7010, the process of setting the addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7011.

Steps S7012 to S7014 are similar to the processes of steps S5509 to S5511, and are processes for managing the number of games in the first specialized zone.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the first processing for specialization in this modified example.

Steps S7101 to S7105 are the same as the above steps S6301 to S6305. In step S7106, it is determined whether or not any specialization flag has been set, and if it has been set, in step S7107 it is determined whether or not a digestion command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S7106 or step S7107, the first processing for specialization ends.

If the digestion command has been received, it is determined in step S7108 whether or not an additional target command has been received, and the lottery result of the game in the first specialized zone is the normal reply A to C as the additional target result. Determine whether or not there is If the determination in step S7108 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7109 whether or not the ending flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the ending effect is being executed. If the ending effect is not being performed, in step S7110, a setting process is executed so that the stop mode instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. As shown in FIG. 139(a), the stop mode instruction effect is advantageous by performing the above-mentioned specific operation mode by displaying a content such as "Stop the replay at the middle stage of the left reel!" and the contents of the specific operation mode are made known to the player.

Then, in step S7111, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set, and if the excess flag is set, in step S7112, setting processing is executed so that the excess notification effect is performed (Fig. 139 (c)).

If no additional target command is received in step S7108 and the game is in the second specialized zone, or if the game is in the first specialized zone but not an additional target result, the ending flag is set in step S7109. If it is set, if the excess flag is set in step S7111, or after the process of step S7112 is executed, the special counter management process is executed in steps S7113 to S7116. The processing of steps S7113 to S7116 is the same as the processing of steps S6311 to S6314.

For example, when the stop mode instruction effect occurs as shown in FIG. 139(a), if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a specific operation mode (FIG. 139(b1)), a larger number of games than usual is added. However, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode (FIG. 139(b2)), the normal number of games is added. Therefore, when the stop mode instruction effect is generated, it is basically advantageous for the player to operate in the specific operation mode.

On the other hand, in a situation where the excess flag is set and the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section or the upper limit of the increase in the number of games is likely to be reached even if the number of games in AT mode is increased or set stock does not occur, a specific operation mode is performed. However, the final number of coins won does not change, and on the contrary, time loss may occur in order to perform the specific operation mode. Then, in a situation where the excessive notification effect (FIG. 139(c)) is occurring, there is a time advantage for the player to prevent the specific operation mode from being performed even if the stop mode instruction effect is generated. Thus, it can be said that the game in the non-specific operation mode is more advantageous for the player than the game in the specific operation mode.

That is, playing the first specialized zone in the specific operation mode is included in the advantageous game in the third embodiment, and the first specialized zone is played in a mode other than the specific operation mode. Playing a game is included in the normal game in the third embodiment. Then, while it is premised that it is advantageous for the player, such as making it possible to add the number of AT mode games by operating in the first specialized zone in a specific operation mode, the first specialized zone , it is advantageous for the player not to operate in the specific operation mode in some situations. It is possible to expect the effect of making the game enjoyable while allowing the player to enjoy the game.

Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of additional target results are provided in the first specialized zone, the difficulty levels of the specific operation modes are varied, and the number of additional games is set according to the difficulty levels. For example, if a first result to be added and a second result to be added are set, and if the result is the first result to be added and the operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the number of games to be added is greater than the specified number of games to be added. In the case of the second additional target result, if the operation is performed in a specific operation mode that is more difficult than the above specific operation mode, the number of games will be greater than in the case of the first additional target result. It is good to have the structure which can perform addition of a number. In this case, in the case of the second additional target result, if the operation is not performed in the specific operation mode, an additional number of games less than the specified number of additional games for the first additional target result is generated. You may make it

More specifically, for example, in the case of the first additional target result, one reel 32L of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has a specific operation mode (the target symbol is stopped at a sliding number of 0). operation), it is possible to add more games (6 games) than the specified number of games to be added (4 games), and in the case of the second addition target result, each reel 32L , 32M, and 32R, it is possible to add a larger number of games (10 games) than in the case of the first additional target result by performing the specific operation mode on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. should be Then, in the second additional target result, when the operation is performed in a mode different from the specific operation mode, the specified number of additional games (2 games), which is less than the first additional target result, is added. should occur.

Furthermore, even if the lottery result of the game in the first special zone is the result to be added, by performing a predetermined avoidance operation, the number of games in the first special zone is not generated and the number of games in the first special zone is counted. It is good also as a structure which can make it not exist. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of additional target results with different numbers of additional games are set when operated in the specific operation mode as described above, if the desired additional target result is the specific operation While challenging to operate in a mode, by performing an avoidance operation if the additional target result is different from that, it is possible to realize the game property of forgoing the additional target result. In addition, even if a plurality of results to be added are not set, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as selecting a challenge to add in a specific operation mode or avoiding even adding according to the condition of the player. can be done. With such a configuration, as in the third embodiment, the player can select between a game that permits the determination of whether or not to perform an addition in the first specialized zone and a game that avoids it. can do. In addition, as the predetermined avoidance operation, for example, as one of the predetermined stop switches 42 to 44, the right stop switch 44 may be operated first. The credit insertion switch 56 may be operated while the wheels 32M and 32R are rotating and before the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, when the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone in the third embodiment is completed with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, the number of games completed is the number of additional games or the set stock. configuration that affects the number of

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing specialized zone count processing in this modified example.

In this modification, it is determined in step S7201 whether or not the second specialized zone flag has been set. If the second specialized zone flag is set and it is in the second specialized zone, it is determined in steps S7202 to S7204 whether or not the number of bets is a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state. . That is, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not the player is in the BB state, and if not in the BB state, it is determined in step S7203 whether or not the number of bets is "3". If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S7204 whether or not the number of bets is "2".

If a negative determination is made in step S7203 or step S7204, and the number is not the specific specified number, the process advances to step S7205 to execute a process of adding 1 to the avoidance counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the avoidance first command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . The avoidance counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of consecutive games in which the specialized zone has been completed with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. The avoidance first command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the avoidance counter addition process has been performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7203 or step S7204 and it is the specific specified number, in step S7206, the avoidance counter is cleared to the initial value of 0, and the avoidance counter is cleared. A process of setting the second command for use as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The avoidance second command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the avoidance counter has been initialized.

After executing the process of step S7205 or step S7206, the number of games in the second specialized zone is managed in steps S7207 to S7209, and then the specialized zone count process ends.

If it is determined in step S7201 that it is not in the second specialized zone, the flow advances to step S7210 to determine whether it is in the first specialized zone. If it is in the first specialized zone, it is determined in steps S7211 to S7213 whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. That is, it is determined in step S7211 whether or not the player is in the BB state, and if not in the BB state, it is determined in step S7212 whether or not the number of bets is "3". If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S7213 whether or not the number of bets is "2".

A negative determination is made in step S7212 or step S7213, and if the number is not the specific specified number, the process advances to step S7214 to execute the process of adding 1 to the avoidance counter and send the avoidance first command to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the output target of . After executing the process of step S7214, the specialized zone count process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7212 or step S7213, and the number is the specific specified number, in step S7215, a process of clearing the avoidance counter to 0, which is the initial value, is executed. A process of setting the second command for use as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

After the process of step S7215 is executed, the number of games in the first specialized zone is managed in steps S7216 to S7218, and then the specialized zone count process ends.

The processing for the first special zone (Fig. 141) and the processing for the second special zone (Fig. 142) in this modified example refer to the value of the above-mentioned avoidance counter at the time of an extra win or a set stock win. The processing is different from that of the third embodiment.

That is, in the process for the first special zone in this modified example, when it is determined in step S7306 that an additional win is made, in step S7307, the process of grasping the avoidance counter is executed. In the subsequent step S7308, a process of calculating the number of games obtained by adding the value of the avoidance counter to the number of games to be added according to the AT random number or the game lottery result as the number of games to be added this time is executed. Then, in step S7309, a process of adding the calculation result to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S7310, a process of setting an additional command is executed, and then the process for the first specialized zone is terminated.

In the process for the second special zone in this modified example, when it is determined in step S7406 that the set stock has been won, in step S7407, the above avoidance counter is grasped. In the subsequent step S7408, a process of calculating a set stock number obtained by multiplying a set stock number corresponding to an AT random number or a game lottery result by a value obtained by adding 1 to an avoidance counter is calculated as the current set stock number. Then, in step S7409, the processing for adding the calculation result to the set counter is executed, and in step S7410, the processing for setting the addition command is executed, and then the processing for the second special zone ends.

That is, in the present modification, in the first specialized zone, if the number of bets other than the specified prescribed number is avoided, the consecutive number of times of avoidance is added to the number of games at the time of extra winning. However, even after the avoidance, if the number of bets is completed with a specific prescribed number of bets and the win is not won, the number of consecutive times of avoidance is cleared to 0, and the benefit of the consecutive number of times of avoidance cannot be enjoyed.

Also in the second special zone, if the number of bets other than the specific prescribed number is avoided, the stock number is multiplied by the number of consecutive avoidances when the set stock is won. However, even after the avoidance, if the set stock is not won after betting with a specific prescribed number of bets, the number of consecutive times of avoidance is cleared to 0, and the benefit of the consecutive number of times of avoidance cannot be enjoyed.

The avoidance count handling process on the display control device 81 side for notifying the above-mentioned consecutive avoidance counts will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 143 . The number-of-avoidance correspondence process is performed, for example, as one process of the other all-stop effect setting process in the all-stop effect setting process.

In the avoidance count handling process, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the avoidance first command has been received. As described above, the avoidance first command is a command that is output when the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone is completed with a bet number other than the specific specified number. If the first command for avoidance has been received, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the first specialized zone by checking whether the first specialized flag is set in step S7502. If it is in the first special zone, in step S7503, the processing for adding and updating the special plus display BP1 on the auxiliary display portion 65 is executed, and then the avoidance count handling processing is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 144(a1), at the end of the game in which the consumption is avoided in the first specialized zone, and the avoidance effect is performed, as shown in FIG. When the specific notification (the first specific notification in the drawing) is made, the number of games to be added at the time of extra winning, such as "+1", is displayed as a special plus display BP1. In step S7503, the number of games displayed in the special plus display BP1 is updated according to the number of avoidance counters.

If the first specialization flag is not set in step S7502 and it is in the second specialization zone, in step S7504, processing for adding and updating the special multiple display BP2 on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed. , the avoidance count handling process ends.

For example, as shown in FIG. 144(a2), at the end of the game in which the consumption is avoided in the second specialized zone and the avoidance effect is performed, as shown in FIG. When the specific notification (the third specific notification in the figure) is made, the multiple to be multiplied when the set stock is won is displayed as the special case number display BP2, such as "x2". Then, in step S7504, a process of updating the multiple displayed in the special multiple display BP2 according to the number of the avoidance counter is performed.

If the avoidance first command has not been received in step S7501, it is determined in step S7502 whether or not the avoidance second command has been received. If the avoidance second command has been received, the special plus display BP1 and the special multiple display BP2 are initialized in step S7506, and then the avoidance count handling process ends. As described above, the avoidance second command is a command that is output when the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone is filled with a specific prescribed number of bets.

In this case, for example, when the first specialized zone is filled with a specific prescribed number of bets and an additional win is won, as shown in FIG. 5 games), the number of games displayed in the special plus display BP1 (1 game in the drawing) is also added to produce an additional effect. Also, for example, when the second specialized zone is filled with a specific prescribed number of bets and the set stock is won, the multiple displayed in the above special multiple display BP2 is added to the normal set stock number. Performs a production in which the set stock is multiplied by Then, during the game number addition effect and the set stock addition effect, the display of the special plus display BP1 and the special multiple display BP2 themselves is initialized (not displayed in this embodiment).

Further, for example, when the next game is completed with a specific prescribed number of bets and the additional lottery is not won or the set stock lottery is not won, as shown in FIG. 144(c2). , A disappointing production is performed. Then, during the disappointment effect, the display of the special plus display BP1 and the special multiple display BP2 themselves are initialized (in this embodiment, they are not displayed).

As described above, in this modified example, since the information for avoiding the execution of the additional lottery and the set stock lottery in the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone can be stored, the avoidance information is added to the winning lottery. It can be used when winning a set stock lottery or the like, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in which it is possible to select whether to avoid or allow the execution of the extra lottery or the set stock lottery.

More specifically, in the above modified example, avoidance causes medal loss by that amount, but the more avoidance is made, the greater the advantage is when the extra winning or the set stock winning is won. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to avoid, considering the balance between the medal loss due to avoidance and the additional benefit using the avoidance information.

In this case, the number of consecutive avoidances is stored as avoidance information (avoidance counter), and if the execution of the extra lottery or set stock lottery is allowed without avoidance, the avoidance information is initialized. , Even after not winning the extra lottery or set stock lottery, additional benefits using avoidance information will not be obtained, and it is necessary to more strictly determine when to allow these lotteries to be executed. can be generated.

Also, by using such avoidance information, it is possible to obtain the advantage of avoiding even in the second special zone where the number of games is counted even if avoidance is performed.

Although the avoidance information is used to add benefits that are advantageous to the player at the time of extra winning or set stock winning, the avoidance information may be used to reduce the number of extra games and the number of set stock. . In particular, in the first specialized zone, since the number of games is not counted by avoiding, if the avoidance information is used to add extra benefits at the time of winning, the merit of avoiding may become too large. There is also sex. Therefore, in the first special zone, the number of additional games is subtracted by the amount of avoidance information (avoidance counter), etc., so that the advantage at the time of additional winning is reduced, so as to avoid based on the specific notification. While urging the player, it is possible to motivate the player to allow the execution of the additional lottery without avoiding even the disadvantageous AT random number or the like so that the merit at the time of the additional winning is not reduced too much. Therefore, the number of parameters for judging whether or not to allow the execution of such an additional lottery increases, and it becomes possible to improve the fun of making the judgment.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) In the first embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won, the advantageous section is terminated. Even if it becomes, it is good also as a structure which does not end an advantageous section. In this case, considering the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) and the upper limit increase in the number of advantageous sections (2400), the upper limit is increased before the upper limit number of games is reached when shifting to AT mode. At a specific number of games (e.g., 950 games) obtained by subtracting the number of games until the specific trigger occurs from the number of games that will reach the number (e.g., 1000 games), you will not win the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger. It is good to have the structure which ends an advantageous section by becoming.

(2) In the configuration in which the lottery mode transition between the first mode and the second mode is performed through the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, the trigger result and the winning probability of winning each lottery mode transition are not limited to those described above. For example, the transition from the second mode to the first mode may occur not only with the normal hand but also with the special hand, or the transition from the first mode to the second mode may occur only with the special hand. good too.

(3) Lottery mode transition Although execution of the lottery is restricted in restricted games, it may also be restricted in permitted games. For example, if a specific role is won in the second mode, if the execution of the lottery mode transition lottery is restricted for a predetermined number of games, the transition from the second mode to the first mode is performed for the predetermined number of games. , and the second mode can be maintained in the permitted game. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be varied depending on the type of specific combination. For example, if Cherry A is selected, execution of the transition lottery for 5 games is restricted, and if Cherry B is selected, the transition lottery for 10 games is restricted. In other words, the transition lottery may be restricted over a longer number of games for a specific role that is less likely to be won as a game lottery result.

Conversely, when the normal combination is won in the first mode, the execution of the lottery for transition to the lottery mode may be restricted for a predetermined number of games.

(4) A uniform winning probability (10% in the first mode, 60% in the second mode) without considering the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific opportunity. However, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery may differ depending on the lottery result of the game and the type of lottery mode in which the player is staying.

(5) In the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific combination before the specific opportunity, the lottery mode may be added. In other words, it may be possible to make it easier to win the AT mode shift lottery even if the same specific role is won when the lottery mode when the specific role is won is the second mode rather than when it is the first mode.

(6) Even before the specific opportunity, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by winning the special role, but it may be configured to perform the AT mode transition lottery even if the normal role is won.

(7) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(8) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(9) Although the same lottery table and the same game base are used in the first BB state and the second BB state, different lottery tables may be used to form different game bases. Even in this case, when the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won, the value to be added to the opportunity through counter may be varied to vary the contribution rate of the special notification to the execution rate. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a larger value is added to the opportunity through counter as the degree (game base) is lower.

(10) In the first BB state and the second BB state, both the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are played. The number of bets may differ depending on the type of BB state, such as playing a 2-bet game in the state.

(11) Games in the first BB state and in the second BB state are both restricted games. For example, games in the first BB state are restricted games, while games in the second BB state are allowed games. The restricted game and the permitted game may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as becoming. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and one or all of them may be a restricted game or an allowed game.

(12) The playing base in BB state is set to be higher than the playing base in 2-bet games, but at least the playing base in BB state should be higher than the playing base in 3-bet games. It can be lower than the base.

(13) In the configuration where the first mode and the second mode are specified in the mode transition table, the number of unit games in which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs is mainly set to 10 games. The unit game number at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may be different, such that the number of games AG in the advantageous section is 1 to 10, 11 to 13, 14 to 55, and so on. In this case, the switching unit game number may be a configuration in which different unit game numbers are repeated such as a first number, a second number, a first number, a second number, etc., and there is regularity in the combination of the unit game numbers. It should be.

(14) In a configuration where the mode transition table defines the first mode and the second mode, the number of unit games at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may differ depending on the type of the mode transition table. . For example, in the first mode transition table (mode transition table of address information MAAAA), the lottery mode is switched at the number of unit games of the first number (10 games), while in the second mode transition table (address information MBBBB mode transition table), the lottery mode may be switched at the second unit game number (25 games). Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which switching occurs for each game such that even-numbered games are in the first mode and odd-numbered games are in the second mode.

(15) A first mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is low and a second mode in which the probability of winning the lottery is high are provided. In the first mode, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity may not be won.

(16) Although the lottery mode is suggested by the rate of occurrence of the special notification that suggests the second mode, at least the notification is predictable as to whether the player is staying in the first mode or the second mode. For example, the lottery mode may be suggested by the rate of occurrence of the special notification that suggests the first mode.

(17) Although multiple types of mode transition tables are provided and the mode transition table to be set is determined by lottery, there is no regularity in the mode transition table to be set even if a uniform mode transition table or multiple types are provided. may be present. For example, after the first mode transition table is set, the second mode transition table may be easily set or may be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to predict the lottery mode from the information of the uniform or the previous mode transition table.

(18) The mode transition table may include a mode transition table associated only with the first mode.

(19) Depending on the type of the set mode transition table, the value to be added to the opportunity through counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won may be varied. For example, when a mode transition table with many games associated with the second mode is set, by increasing the value to be added to the opportunity slew counter when the AT mode is not won, the player's feeling of loss is given a special notification. It can be filled well.

(20) The value to be added to the opportunity through counter when the AT mode is not won is not limited to the information of the game that caused the specific opportunity (number of bets, BB state or not, type of BB state, etc.), other information may be used to set the value to be added to the trigger through counter. For example, the value to be added may be set using the information of the game before the occurrence of the specific opportunity. Specifically, if the transition to the BB state is made before reaching the specific opportunity, the value to be added to the opportunity through counter is reduced/increased even if the game causing the specific opportunity is not in the BB state. may be Further, the value to be added to the opportunity through counter may be set according to the medal decrease number/increase number until a specific opportunity occurs.

(21) It is configured such that a specific role can be won even in a 2-bet game, and the AT mode shift lottery is not performed when a specific role is won in a 2-bet game. . In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special combination can be won even in the BB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed when the special combination is won in the BB state.

(22) Although the 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB win and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB win, the 3-bet game is more difficult to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(23) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(24) When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if the number of credits is less than the value set in the MAX bet counter, no bet may be made. A configuration may be adopted in which a bet is made according to the number of credits. However, if the latter is adopted, the possibility of unintentionally playing restricted games increases. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which no bets are made when the number of credits does not reach the MAX bet counter, as in the former. .

(25) When the MAX bet counter is set to 3, it is possible to set 2 bets by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or other operating units, and the MAX bet counter is set to 2. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a 3-bet can be set by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or other operating units.

(26) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(27) The special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode may not be executed in the replay winning game (replay winning game), or may be configured to be more difficult to execute than other winning games or losing result games. good. By winning a replay, it is necessary to play the next game with the same number of bets. This is because the configuration does not allow switching even if one tries to do so.

(28) Although the game feature of shifting the lottery mode to the second mode has been described before a specific opportunity occurs, it is assumed that predetermined points can be awarded in each game until the specific opportunity occurs, and the points are determined according to the points. A configuration may be adopted in which an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific trigger. The predetermined points may be given according to the lottery result of the game. It is preferable that predetermined points are awarded for permitted games such as 3-bet games, while predetermined points are not awarded for restricted games such as 2-bet games.

(29) The description has been made on the assumption that the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on a specific trigger, but the lottery performed based on the specific trigger is not limited to the AT mode transition lottery. For example, it may be a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, a lottery for transition to an additional specialized zone in AT mode, an additional lottery for AT mode, or an additional game number lottery. Furthermore, it may be an execution lottery of a predetermined effect (for example, setting value suggesting effect).

(30) In a configuration in which a lottery random number is obtained in advance and a lottery is performed using the random number and the lottery result of each game, an AT counter used for the AT mode transition lottery as the lottery random number is taken as an example. Although explained, each of the above inventions may be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for the advantageous zone transition lottery is acquired in advance, or to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in the add-on special zone transition lottery is acquired in advance. However, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for an extra lottery or an extra game count lottery is acquired in advance, or a lottery counter used for a lottery for a predetermined effect (for example, a set value suggesting effect) may be acquired in advance. May be applied to the configuration to be obtained.

That is, the specific event for determining whether or not it will occur based on the specific information (random number) acquired in advance is not limited to the transition to the AT mode, but may be the transition to the advantageous section, or the special event. It may be a transition to a zone, an addition to the number of games, an addition to a predetermined number of games (more or fewer additional games), or a predetermined effect. good.

(31) The AT counter as the random number for the lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery has been configured to be acquired at the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, but may be acquired at other timings. good too. For example, it may be during the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. Further, it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the credit input switches 56-58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to progress based on the operations, or may be acquired based on invalid operations during a period during which the operations are invalid. Furthermore, it is not limited to the configuration in which it is acquired immediately based on the operation, for example, it may be configured to be acquired after a predetermined period of time based on the operation, or when the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated. may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, such as not obtaining when the right stop switch 44 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated.

(32) When acquiring the AT counter in the random number acquisition process, the configuration is such that the AT counter is acquired independently of the game lottery result, etc., without being affected by the game lottery result, etc. at the time of acquisition. However, the configuration may be such that the AT counters obtained based on the lottery result of the game may differ. For example, when the lottery result of the game is the first result such as strong cherry, an AT counter with a value of 1 in the first numerical range "1" to "64" is acquired, and the lottery result of the game is In the case of a second result such as a strong watermelon, an AT counter with a value of 1 from "65" to "128" is acquired as the second numerical range, depending on the lottery result in the game A configuration may be adopted in which the numerical values to be acquired are defined.

Furthermore, the type of AT counter to be acquired may differ depending on the lottery mode. For example, in the first mode, as the first numerical range, an AT counter with a value of 1 out of "1" to "128" is acquired, while in the second mode, as the second numerical range, "1" to "64 , an AT counter having a value of 1 out of . In this case, the priority of the second mode over the first mode may be set according to the numerical range of the acquired AT counter.

(33) Although the 3-bet game played with the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game carried over is explained as a normal game, it is based on the 2-bet game played with the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game carried over. A game may be a normal game, or a second bet game or a third bet game performed without carrying over the 1st BB or the 2nd BB may be the normal game. A 2-bet game played with the 2nd BB carried over may be the normal game, and a 3-bet game played with the 1st BB carried over may be the normal game.

(34) As the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, the first mode and the second mode are provided, but the number of lottery modes may be plural, and may be three or more.

(35) In the third embodiment, execution of these lotteries is permitted or avoided according to the AT random number and the number of games in the advantageous section AG in the special zone for the AT mode game number addition lottery and the set stock lottery. Although the configuration has been described, in a chance zone (second mode) where the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery may be permitted or avoided according to the AT random number or the like. In this case, for example, after one set of AT mode ends, the player shifts to the chance zone instead of the first specialized zone, and when the player wins the AT mode shift lottery in the chance zone, the player shifts to the AT mode again. and Also, when one set of AT mode ends, even if there is a set stock, the next set of AT mode is executed after shifting to the chance zone. Then, by specifying the number of execution times of the AT mode transition lottery in the chance zone and performing specific notification according to the AT random number obtained in advance in the chance zone, it is possible to deal with AT random numbers that are difficult to win in the AT mode transition lottery. To realize game characteristics such as avoiding the execution of an AT mode shift lottery if it is a specific notification and permitting the execution of an AT mode shift lottery if it is a specific notification corresponding to an AT random number that is likely to win the AT mode shift lottery. be able to. By doing so, in a situation where it is known in advance that the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied, such as when there is a large amount of set stock, in the chance zone, the AT mode transition is performed according to the AT random number. A normal game that allows execution of an AT mode transition lottery regardless of an AT random number is more advantageous for a player than an advantageous game that avoids the execution of the lottery.

(36) Although it is configured to always shift to the first specialized zone when the AT mode is started, it may be configured to shift to the first specialized zone based on the establishment of the condition. For example, if you win the first special zone transition lottery during the AT mode of the previous set, or if you win the first special zone transition lottery at the start of one set of AT mode or when you win the AT mode transition lottery It may be configured such that the above conditions are satisfied when winning a lottery.

(37) In the third embodiment, the initial number of games in one set of AT mode is not limited to 30 games, but may be less or more. Alternatively, the initial number of games may be 0, and the number of games won in the first specialized zone may be the number of games for one set.

(38) At the start of the AT mode, it may be configured to shift to the second specialized zone instead of the first specialized zone. That is, when the AT mode starts, the player is moved to the second specialized zone where the probability of winning the set stock lottery is high. The AT mode of the set is started, and if the set stock lottery is not won in the second specialized zone, the advantageous section may end as it is. In this case, when a game avoiding the set stock lottery is played in the second specialized zone, it is preferable not to count the number of games in the second specialized zone.

(39) In the first specialized zone, the push order notification is not performed, but this is not a configuration in which the push order notification is not performed completely, and the execution rate of the push order notification is lower than in the AT mode. Alternatively, the mode of notification of the pressing order becomes a mode that is more difficult for the player to grasp than in the AT mode (for example, the stop switches 42 to 44 that should be operated first are notified, but the switches that are operated second are notified). The switch 42 to 44 may be configured such that the stop switches 42 to 44 do not notify.

(40) By preventing notification of the pressing order in the first specialized zone, the expected increase/decrease in the number of sheets per game is set to be negative. The expected increase/decrease number per game may be negative.

(41) Although the example of allowing or avoiding the execution of the extra lottery in the first specialized zone has been explained, for example, the bonus state can be played in a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game, and any bet can be made. With a specific prescribed number of games (e.g., two-bet games), the condition for ending the bonus state is that the number of games completed with the specific prescribed number of bets reaches a specific number, and the specific prescribed number of bets is made. While the AT mode transition lottery, additional lottery, set stock lottery, etc. are performed in games that have been completed in , the execution of these lotteries can be avoided in games that have been completed with a bet number other than the specified specified number. good.

(42) By setting the excess flag, an ending effect can be executed to notify that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase in the number of games in the advantageous section has been reached. It is good also as a structure which is hard to carry out. If the ending effect is not performed or is configured to be difficult to be performed, it is possible to increase the significance of executing the excess notification effect.

(43) A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the set stock lottery is not notified. Further, in the notification when the set stock lottery is won, the number of stocked sets may not be notified. In addition, when the set stock lottery is won in a situation where the set stock exists, the notification of the winning of the set stock lottery may not be performed or may be made less likely than when the set stock does not exist. In the above-described third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games or the upper limit number of increases in the advantageous section is reached, depending on how much set stock remains. By adopting a configuration in which the number is difficult to grasp, the significance of executing the excess notification effect is enhanced, and the selection of whether to complete the first specialized zone in an advantageous game or in a normal game becomes more interesting. Increased.

(44) Although the configuration for allowing or avoiding the execution of advantageous additional lotteries, etc. by switching the number of bets and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., has been explained, is it possible to allow the execution of additional lotteries, etc.? The operation means for selecting whether to avoid is not limited to the credit insertion switches 56, 57, the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and other operation means (start lever 41, etc.) may be used. Moreover, you may provide the operation means for it separately.

(45) The present invention can also be applied to a so-called pachinko machine that has a ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and in which a predetermined lottery is conducted when a game ball enters the ball entry section. It is possible, for example, whether to allow or avoid the execution of the predetermined lottery, the shooting operation to enter the game ball into the ball entering section, the non-entering of the game ball into the ball entering section, or other ball entering It may be configured so that the player can select it by the shooting operation of entering the game ball into the part.

(46) A situation in which one of the excess flags is set is a situation in which it is more advantageous for the player to play the first specialized zone in the normal game than in the advantageous game. In situations where the playable time and the number of games are limited, such as when the hall is about to close, the situation may be such that there is a set stock up to the playable time and the number of games. In this case, for example, it is possible to set (input) the closing time of the game hall, calculate the playable time and the number of games from the closing time, and determine whether or not to execute the above-mentioned excess notification effect. good too. The number of games that can be played can be calculated from the number of games that can be played per unit time. Instead of the closing time of the game hall, the player can set a time limit individually according to the player, and it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the excess notification effect from the time limit.

(47) Although it is configured such that the excess notification effect is performed by setting the excess flag, it is also possible to configure the occurrence rate of the excess notification effect to change according to the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. Well, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the excess notification effect is more likely to occur as the amount remaining to the upper limit decreases. In this case, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increased number can be grasped by the remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process.

(48) There may be provided a plurality of first special zones with different AT random numbers and the number of advantageous interval games AG, which are the first numerical value bands that are likely to result in extra winnings or set stock winnings. For example, a first specialized zone with a first probability (40%) of obtaining an AT random number in the first numerical band and a second probability (20%) of obtaining an AT random number in the first numerical band is lower than the first probability. %), the number of games required for an advantageous game is greater than the former first specialized zone (approximately 25 games) than the latter first specialized zone (approximately 50 games). less than Then, the loss of medals in the case of playing an advantageous game in the former first specialized zone is smaller than the loss of medals in the case of playing an advantageous game in the latter first specialized zone. Therefore, the former first specialized zone has more merits when playing an advantageous game than the latter second specialized zone, and the significance of playing an advantageous game is high. Also, in this case, the number of games in the latter first specialized zone in which the first numerical range is added is greater than the number of games in which the first numerical range is added in the former first specialized zone. Therefore, the significance of performing the latter first specialized zone in an advantageous game can be enhanced. Further, a plurality of first specialized zones may be provided in which the AT random number acquisition rate in the first numerical range is common, but the number of additional games in the first numerical range is different.

(49) Although the number of games in the first specialized zone increases or decreases depending on whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, the number of games may be changed depending on other factors. In this case, by increasing the number of games in the first specialized zone, the ratio of AT mode until the end of the advantageous section increases, and by reducing the number of games in the first specialized zone, until the end of the advantageous section It is preferable that there is a case where the ratio of the AT mode is high. The other factor may be, for example, the number of wins or winnings of a predetermined result, or the number of payouts or the number of increased coins.

(50) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(51) A slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(52) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(53) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
a game number grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the number of games AG in an advantageous interval by the main controller 101) for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity (advantage interval transition game);
Giving that makes it possible to determine whether or not to award a privilege to a player, assuming that the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches a specific number and that a predetermined judgment trigger (specific trigger) has occurred. Determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (main controller 101 switching to AT mode) the ability to perform an action that causes a transition);
with
A high grant state (second mode) in which the grant determination result by the grant determination means is likely to result in the grant correspondence result, and a low grant state (first mode) in which the grant correspondence result is less likely or not obtained than in the high grant state. is set and
When a predetermined first transition opportunity is established, a first transition means for shifting from the low grant state to the high grant state (a function of executing a process of clearing the first mode flag by the main controller 101);
When a predetermined second transition opportunity is established, a second transition means for shifting from the high grant state to the low grant state (a function of executing a process of setting the first mode flag by the main controller 101);
with
As the game started by the game starting means, a first game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity can be established, and the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity. A second game (for example, a two-bet game) whose establishment is restricted is set,
A gaming machine, wherein the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and finished based on an end operation, the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger is a specific number. Given that a predetermined judgment opportunity has occurred when reaching , grant determination is made as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and the result of the grant determination is a high grant state and a grant correspondence result that are likely to be grant correspondence results. Since the low provision state is set, the privilege provision rate differs depending on which provision state the provision determination is performed, and the game can be diversified. In such a configuration, the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game, but does not occur in the second game. It is a shortcut to In addition, the number of games for generating the determination opportunity that triggers the grant determination includes both the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game. Therefore, for example, when a transition to a high grant state occurs in the first game, while maintaining the high grant state in the second game, it is possible to realize a game that waits until a judgment opportunity for grant determination occurs. can. By doing so, while using the configuration in which the first game and the second game are present as games started by the player's start operation, the player can determine the situation such as the grant state and the establishment of the determination opportunity. It is possible to realize an interesting game property such as selecting which game to play according to the situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, you may express said "high provision state" as a "1st state" and a "low provision state" as a "2nd state." In this case, the "second mode" shown in the first embodiment corresponds to the "first state", and the "first mode" corresponds to the "second state". Also, the "first transition opportunity" may be expressed as the "first transition condition", and the "second transition opportunity" may be expressed as the "second transition condition". These representation changes are also applicable to other features or feature groups.

Feature A2. In the first game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is permitted, while in the second game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, for example, after the determination opportunity is generated in the second game, it becomes necessary to switch to the first game in order to receive the award determination. By doing so, in a series of games such as switching to the second game after shifting to the high grant state in the first game, and switching to the first game after causing a judgment opportunity in the second game, Not only the playability of determining the timing of switching to the second game, but also the playability of determining the timing of switching to the first game is added to further improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3. Characteristic A1 or characterized in that the provision determination means is configured to execute the provision determination in the first game after it is grasped by the game number grasping means that the specific number has been reached. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

According to the above configuration, even if the game that reaches the specific number is the second game, by switching to the first game after that, grant determination is performed in the switched game. In this way, even if the game is advanced while maintaining the high grant state by the second game, it is clarified that the grant determination is performed by switching to the first game after that. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as grant determination not being made if the game to be reached is the second game, or grant determination not being made for a long time after switching to the first game.

Feature A4. Features A1 to A3 characterized in that the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity are not established after the number of games executed from the predetermined start opportunity reaches the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, if the transition to the high grant state is made before the number of executions reaches the specific number, the transition to the low grant state will not occur in subsequent games. Conversely, if the number of executions does not shift to the high grant state before reaching the specific number, the subsequent game will not transition to the high grant state, and the player will have no choice but to receive grant determination in the low grant state. Therefore, how the state of reaching the specific number is the high grant state is the key to the game, and it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the game up to the specific number.

Moreover, for example, if the above configuration is applied to the feature A2, after switching to the high grant state in the first game, switching to the second game, and after reaching a specific number, switching to the first game again to receive grant determination In this case, transition from the high grant state to the low grant state is avoided. In this way, in the first game, the state is shifted to the high grant state, the high grant state is maintained in the second game, the specific number is reached, and the grant judgment is received in the first game. A game can be realized more suitably.

Feature A5. Based on the fact that a predetermined notification opportunity has been established (that a special notification lottery has been won), a special notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state can be executed by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by comprising special notification means (a function of executing special notification processing by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ascertain whether the current grant determination state is the high grant state or the low grant state by the special notification. As a result, it is possible to preferably implement a game such as switching to the second game to reach the specific number after shifting to the high grant state in the first game.

The "notification opportunity" may be expressed as "notification condition".

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the notification opportunity is satisfied as one condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, the result of grant determination by the grant determination means does not become the grant correspondence result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the privilege is not granted. As a result, it becomes easier to perform a game that determines the transition to the high grant state, and grant determination is more likely to be executed in the high grant state. Therefore, it is possible to follow up well the decrease in the player's desire to play when the award correspondence result is not obtained.

Feature A7. As game states, a specific state (advantageous section) in which granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is allowed, and a normal state (normal section) in which granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is restricted are set. cage,
When the specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, initialization means for executing initialization processing of various information used in the specific state (initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101 function),
This game machine is
A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the grant determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means,
The second control device stores specific information used for success or failure of the notification opportunity (the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger was not won) across the specific state. A gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, characterized by comprising a through counter).

According to the above configuration, grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, a specific state in which a privilege can be granted, and a normal state in which the grant of the privilege is restricted are set, and when transitioning from the specific state to the normal state Since the various information used in the specific state is initialized, the information in the specific state is not carried over to the normal state, and assuming that the game starts from the normal state, that Fairness among players is ensured at the start. On the other hand, this excessive attempt to ensure fairness increases the possibility that the game will end when the specific state ends, and there is concern about a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of the specific state as described above, the special notification corresponding to the high grant state and the low grant state is executed. Since information can be stored across specific states, it is possible to associate each specific state with the special notification. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game across the specific state, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Feature A8. The notification opportunity is established as one condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific information is information corresponding to the number of times of the grant determination that does not result in the grant correspondence result.

According to the above configuration, the result of grant determination by the grant determination means does not become the grant correspondence result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the privilege is not granted. As a result, it becomes easier to perform a game that determines the transition to the high grant state, and grant determination is more likely to be executed in the high grant state. Therefore, it is possible to follow up well the decrease in the player's desire to play when the award correspondence result is not obtained.

On top of that, the number of grant determinations that did not result in grant correspondence is stored across specific states, so that the so-called ceiling function until privilege grant is performed across a plurality of specific states by using the specific information. Realization is possible.

Feature A9. Said special notification means, as said special notification corresponding to said high grant state or said low grant state, a situation in which playing a game according to said second game is more advantageous for a player than playing a game according to said first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, characterized in that it is capable of informing that it is.

According to the above configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to play the second game than to play the first game instead of directly informing the high grant state or the low grant state, and the second game Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player has succeeded in maintaining the high award state by his or her own operation, and has won the award response result. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A10. A plurality of stages are set for setting values that can change the rate of increase or decrease or mode of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by),
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means, the notification trigger is established. The game machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, characterized in that the easiness is different.

According to the above configuration, a setting difference is provided in the execution rate of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to change the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game media by using the special notification corresponding to the high grant state and the low grant state, thereby contributing to the diversification of games.

Feature A11. The special notification means, in one game, the special notification at a timing later than the transition timing of shifting to the high grant state by the first transition means or shifting to the low grant state by the second transition means. The game machine according to any one of features A5 to A10, which is executable.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is executed after the transition from the low grant state to the high grant state or from the high grant state to the low grant state in one game. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the next game should be the first game or the second game based on the special notification. That is, if the order of the transition and the notification is reversed, and the transition of the grant state can occur after the special notification, it is possible to switch to the first game or the second game based on the special notification. In spite of this, the game following the special notification may be in a state different from the provision state indicated by the special notification. On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to favorably carry out a game using the special notification without causing such inconvenience.

Feature A12. Based on the game result of the first game, the first transition opportunity is established,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the second transition opportunity is established based on the game result of the first game.

According to the above configuration, since the transition to the high grant state or the low grant state occurs based on the game result of the first game, while predicting the transition of the grant state from the game result of the first game, to the second game It is possible to realize a game to switch. Therefore, attention to the game result of the first game is dramatically increased.

Feature A13. When the game result of the first game is a predetermined first game result (specific combination), the first transition opportunity can be established, while the second transition opportunity is more established than the first transition opportunity. In addition, when the game result of the first game is a second game result (for example, normal response A to normal response C) different from the first game result, the second transition opportunity can be established. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first transition opportunity is less likely to materialize than the second transition opportunity.

According to the above configuration, if the game result of the first game is the first game result, the first transition opportunity occurs and it is easy to shift to the high grant state, and if it is the second game result, the second transition opportunity occurs. Therefore, the player plays while expecting the game result to be the first game result and expects the game result not to be the second game result. In this case, there is a possibility that the second transition opportunity will occur if the result is the first game result, and there is also a possibility that the first transition opportunity will occur if the result is the second game result. Although it is possible to predict to some extent whether it stays in the granted state, it is not determined. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the fun of predicting the given state and improve the interest of the first game.

Feature A14. The grant determination means determines that the game result of the game is a predetermined specific result (specific combination) in the game before the game number grasping means grasps that the number of games has reached the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the grant determination can be executed in some cases.

According to the above configuration, even if the game is played before the number of games reaches the specific number, if the game result of the game is the specific result, the award determination can be executed. By doing so, the game does not become sluggish until reaching the specific number, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A15. The grant determination means can execute the grant determination if the game for which the game result is the specified result is the first game, while the execution of the grant determination is restricted if the game is the second game. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it has a configuration or a configuration that does not result in the specified result in the second game.

According to the above configuration, although the grant determination is performed if the specific result is obtained in the first game, the grant determination is not performed even if the specific result is obtained in the second game, or the specific result is not obtained in the second game. Since it is configured so that it does not occur, it can be a motivation to play in the first game. In this way, it is possible to play a game not only to wait for a high award state in the first game, but also to wait for a specific result, thereby further improving the interest of the game.

Feature A16. The first transition opportunity occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the first transition number, and the second transition opportunity occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the second transition number. Transition number information storage means (various table storage area of ROM 105 of main controller 101) capable of storing a plurality of types of transition number information (mode transition table) between the first transition number and the second transition number determined to occur 105a);
Selecting means for selecting one piece of transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start opportunity (executing advantageous section transition game processing by main controller 101) function) and
Transition opportunity determination means (by the main controller 101) capable of determining whether or not the game corresponds to establishment of the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity based on the transition number information selected by the selection means and a function of executing a mode determination process based on the mode transition table.

According to the above configuration, since the occurrence of the transition timing of both granted states is determined by the transition count information and the number of games executed, it is possible for the gaming machine side to grasp the transition of the granted state in advance. By doing so, the configuration for determining the occurrence of the transition opportunity in each game is overwhelmingly simple compared to the configuration in which the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of each game like the feature A12. In addition, for example, it is possible to notify in advance how long it will take for the transition opportunity to occur. Therefore, in order to realize a game property using both provision states, simplification of the configuration and enhancement of interest can be achieved.

Feature A17. The transition opportunity determination means determines whether or not the game corresponds to establishment of the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity based on the game number grasped by the game number grasping means and the transition number information. The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized in that it is possible to determine whether.

According to the above configuration, the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is the total number of the number of games in the first game and the number of games in the second game. In the configuration for shifting the state, even if the second game is being played, it is possible to determine whether or not the current number of games is a game corresponding to the occurrence of the first transition opportunity or the second transition opportunity. be. That is, even if the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity do not actually occur in the second game and the grant state does not transition, it is possible to determine that the number of games has been reached. In this way, while the player is avoiding the transition of the provision state in the second game, it is also possible to notify whether or not it is permissible to switch to the first game. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest of the game in which the switching between the first game and the second game is performed.

Feature A18. In the second game, the game base, which is the average value of the difference between the game value (bet number) used in the game and the game value (payout number) given as a result of the game, is higher than that in the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, which is set to be higher.

According to the above configuration, after shifting to the high grant state in the first game, in the game property of switching to the second game until the number of games reaches a specific number, the loss of the game value in the second game is reduced. can be reduced. Even with such a configuration, since the transition to the high grant state is restricted in the second game, the significance of performing the game in the first game is secured.

Feature A19. Based on the player's operation, bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount (function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101),
a game for which a first bet amount (3 bets) is set by the bet amount setting means is the first game;
The game according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the game for which a second bet amount (2 bets) different from the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means is the second game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can switch between the first game and the second game simply by switching the number of bets in the game. By doing so, for example, when switching to the second game when the transition to the high grant state occurs, regardless of the skill level of the game of the player, it is possible to easily switch the game.

In addition, the invention described in the features A1 to A19 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
Mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification executing means (advantageous section), and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification executing means cannot be executed (Normal section) and are set,
a game number grasping means (advantage section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means becomes a specific number, the transition determination means (AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that can execute the transition determination of whether to shift to the specific state functions to perform) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB), and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, the game state is changed to a special state. special transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to a game state and ending the special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition;
with
The game number grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games in the special game state,
In the special game state, the specific processing (processing related to the instruction function), including the transition determination by the transition determination unit, can be restricted by a restriction means (the number of bets by the main controller 101 can be specified according to the game state). A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a process for restricting a process related to the instruction function when the specified number is not reached.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, the specific state in which mode notification is possible is set to be able to transition to the advantageous state, and the mode notification itself is not performed in the normal state, so the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is secured. be done. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, a transition to a specific state is determined. A game property aiming at reaching a specific number is realized.

In addition, in this gaming machine, a special game state is set as a so-called bonus state in which the result of the lottery becomes the transition result, and when the pattern combination for transition to the effective position stops, the transition is made, and the number of games during the special game state Since it is included in the number of games to reach the above specific number, it may be more advantageous for the player to play the game in the advantageous state as special game state as much as possible. On the other hand, in the special game state, the execution of the specific process related to the mode notification including the transition determination is restricted. A situation may arise in which the transition decision is made under unfavorable circumstances.

In this way, in order to earn the number of games for performing the transition determination that causes the transition to the specific state during the advantageous state, it is better for the player to cause the transition to the special game state. While making it possible to obtain a profit, the execution of the specific processing relating to the mode notification is restricted unless the transition timing to the special game state and the end timing are determined, so that the special game state can be obtained during the advantageous state. A playability that makes it possible to determine whether or not to cause a transition is realized, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature B2. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, a retaining means (main controller) capable of withholding the transition result information indicating the transition result 101 to set the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag),
The feature B1 is characterized in that the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games in a reserved state (internal state) in which the shift result information is reserved in the retaining means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the number of games in the reserved state, which is the state in which the transition result is won, also contributes to the specific number. By doing so, the game can be progressed while waiting for transition to the special game state until the desired transition timing is reached in the reserved state.

Feature B3. Based on the player's operation, bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount (function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101),
The limiting means permits execution of the specific process in a game started with a first bet (3 bet) set by the bet setting means, is a configuration that can limit the execution of the specific process in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bet) set,
In the game started after the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the symbol combination for transition may stop at the valid position, while the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the pattern combination for transition is set so as not to stop or to be difficult to stop at the effective position in the game started after the game is started.

According to the above configuration, in order to cause a transition to the special game state, it is necessary to switch the number of bets in the game from the first number of bets to the second number of bets. In this case, execution of the specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, while execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount. Limited execution. In other words, if a game is played with the first number of bets to execute the specific process, the transition to the special game state does not occur. Limiting events can be avoided.

Feature B4. Based on the player's operation, bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount (function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101),
The limiting means permits execution of the specific process in a game started with a first bet (3 bet) set by the bet setting means, is a configuration that can limit the execution of the specific process in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bet) set,
In the game started with the second bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the transition result, while the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means and started. In the game, the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the transitional result, or the transitional result is set so as to be less likely than when the first bet number is set. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, in order to win as a result of the transition to the special game state, it is necessary to switch the number of bets in the game from the first number of bets to the second number of bets. In this case, execution of the specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, while execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount. Limited execution. In other words, if a game is played with the first number of bets in order to execute the specific process, it is difficult to win as a result of the transition that may cause a shift to the special game state. It is possible to prevent an event in which execution of specific processing is restricted.

Feature B5. Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the transition to the special game state to the end of the special game state can be less than the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to the special game state is caused, the number of games does not reach a specific number, for example, when the transition to the special game state is made shortly after the transition to the advantageous state , a situation may occur in which the specific number is not reached when the special game state ends. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably execute a game that waits for the timing to cause the transition to the special game state in which the execution of the specific process is restricted.

Feature B6. Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the transition to the special game state to the end of the special game state can be greater than the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the special game state is caused, the number of games reaches the specific number. Therefore, for example, if the transition to the special game state is made shortly after transitioning to the advantageous state, the specific number will always be reached when the special game state ends. By doing so, it is possible to respond to various needs of the player, such as when there is a circumstance where even the execution of the specific process before shifting to the special game state is desired to be restricted.

Feature B7. As the special game state, a first special game state in which the game result of the game becomes the first game result (first BB winning), and a game result of the game becomes the second game result (second BB winning). A second special game state that transitions with is set,
While the number of games executed from the occurrence of the transition to the first special game state to the end of the first special game state can be greater than the specific number,
Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the occurrence of the transition to the second special game state to the end of the second special game state can be less than the specific number. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of special game state to be shifted, there are cases where it is confirmed that the specific number is reached during the special game state, and cases where it is not confirmed that the specific number is reached during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to make use of the relationship between the restriction on the execution of the specific process and the specific number, including the type of transition to the special game state, to improve interest.

Feature B8. The number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is more likely to reach the specific number in the second special game state than in the first special game state. (If AT is not elected due to a specific opportunity that occurs during the 1st BB, it is better to receive a special notification than if the AT is not elected due to a specific opportunity that occurred during the 1st BB.) The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the game machine is set so as to increase the degree of contribution to execution.

According to the above configuration, the second special game state in which the number of games can be smaller than the specific number is more advantageous than the first special game state in which the number of games can be larger than the specific number. , it is more advantageous to reach a specific number by playing at least the normal game state in the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which a specific number is reached while combining the normal game state and the special game state.

Feature B9. In the special game state, the game base, which is the average value of the difference between the game value (the number of bets) used in the game and the game value (the number of payouts) given as a result of the game, is higher than in the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is set so that

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific process is restricted in the special game state, but the game base is set to be high, so that the specific number can be reached without requiring a large amount of game value. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a game that receives a transition determination to a specific state by using the special game state.

Feature B10. According to the result of the specific processing executed before the number of games in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, the transition to the specific state is made by the transition determination means based on the fact that the number of games has reached the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein probabilities of outcomes corresponding to transitions are different.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific process executed before reaching the specific number affects the result of the transition determination executed when the specific number is reached. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game property in which the specific number is successfully reached by using the special game state while executing the specific process.

Feature B11. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, a retaining means (main controller) capable of withholding the transition result information indicating the transition result 101 to set the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag),
The restricting means is means capable of restricting the execution of the specific process (non-internal state by the main controller 101) until the transition result information is retained by the retaining means after the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of setting the MAX bet counter to 2 in .

According to the above configuration, even after the end of the special game state, the execution of the specific process is restricted until the transfer result information is reserved by the reservation means, so that the specific number included in the specific process Execution of the transition decision will also be restricted until it is in a pending state. By doing so, the state of the reserved state is maintained as much as possible, and the special game state is used so as not to cause an event to wait for the transition result winning after the timing to shift to the special game state has come. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the game property that makes it easier to receive the transition determination.

In addition, the invention described in the above features B1 to B11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B11, features A1 to A19, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Giving determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) that can execute grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player when a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs; ,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (main controller 101 switching to AT mode) the ability to perform actions that cause a transition);
with
A high grant state (second mode) in which the grant determination result by the grant determination means is likely to result in the grant correspondence result, and a low grant state (first mode) in which the grant correspondence result is less likely or not obtained than in the high grant state. is set and
a game number grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the number of games AG in an advantageous interval by the main controller 101) for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity (advantage interval transition game);
When a predetermined first transition opportunity is established, a first transition means for shifting from the low grant state to the high grant state (a function of executing a process of clearing the first mode flag by the main controller 101);
When a predetermined second transition opportunity is established, a second transition means for shifting from the high grant state to the low grant state (a function of executing a process of setting the first mode flag by the main controller 101);
The first transition opportunity occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the first transition number, and the second transition opportunity occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the second transition number. Transition number information storage means (various table storage areas of ROM 105 of main controller 101) capable of storing a plurality of types of transition number information (mode transition table) between the first transition number and the second transition number determined to occur 105a);
Selecting means for selecting one piece of transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start opportunity (executing advantageous section transition game processing by main controller 101) function) and
It is possible to determine whether or not the game corresponds to the high grant state and the low grant state based on the transition number information selected by the selection means and the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means. state determination means (function for performing mode determination processing based on the mode transition table by the main controller 101);
with
As the game started by the game starting means, a first game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity can be established, and the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity. A second game (for example, a two-bet game) whose establishment is restricted is set,
A gaming machine, wherein the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine, in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and finished based on an end operation, when a predetermined judgment opportunity occurs, the game can be played. A grant determination is made as to whether or not to grant benefits to the person, and the result of the grant determination is set to a high grant state that is likely to result in grant correspondence and a low grant state that is unlikely to result in grant correspondence. Depending on whether or not grant determination is performed in the state, the benefit grant rate differs, thereby diversifying the game. In such a configuration, the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game, but does not occur in the second game. It is a shortcut to

In addition, since the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state is determined by the number of transition information and the number of games played between the first game and the second game, the transition of the grant state is grasped in advance on the gaming machine side. In addition, even if it is a second game in which the transition of the granted state does not occur, it is possible for the gaming machine side to grasp which granted state the current game corresponds to. . In this way, the information grasped on the gaming machine side is configured to be notified to the player, or the content of grant determination and the content of other processing are changed based on the grasped information. As such, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability in which the first game in which the transition of the granted state can occur and the second game in which the transition cannot occur are set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. A special notification means (function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the determination result of the state determination means by a predetermined notification means is provided. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, switching between the first game and the second game can be favorably performed based on the special notification.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification even when the second game is being played.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the second game is played in which no transition of the granted state occurs, the special notification allows the player to determine in which state the granted state is when the first game is assumed. comprehensible. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the timing of switching to the first game is determined by the special notification.

Feature C4. The feature C2 or the feature C3 characterized in that the special notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the special notification when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the grant determination is not won, special notification is made easier, so that the next grant determination is easily received in a high grant state, and the grant determination is won. It is possible to make it easier to do so, and it is possible to follow up well the player's disappointment due to the fact that the award determination is not won. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to win the grant determination only by special notification without changing the configuration of the probability of winning the grant determination or the trigger for transition of the grant state, even if the grant determination is not won. Since it is possible, it is possible to compensate for non-winning without changing complicated processing, and even if there is a situation where the above-mentioned winning probability or transition timing cannot be changed, the compensation It is possible to do

Feature C5. Features C1 to C4, wherein a plurality of the first transition numbers or a plurality of the second transition numbers are set in the predetermined transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

In the above configuration, a plurality of first transition numbers are set in the predetermined transition number information, the number of games in which the first transition opportunity from the low grant state to the high grant state occurs is multiple, and the low grant state to the high grant state state, and then, after moving to a low grant state, it can further shift to a high grant state, and a plurality of second transition number information is set in the predetermined transition number information, and from the high grant state to the low It is defined that the number of games in which the second transition opportunity to the granting state occurs is plural times, the high granting state is shifted to the low granting state, and after that, the state is shifted to the high granting state, and then further shifted to the low granting state. It is. By doing so, it is clarified that the low grant state and the high grant state repeatedly come and go, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by switching between the two games while predicting the transition between the two grant states.

Feature C6. When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is a predetermined number, transition number information determined by the state determination means to correspond to the high grant state, and corresponding to the low grant state by the state determination means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein each piece of transition number information is stored in the transition number information storage means such that there is transition number information to be determined.

According to the above configuration, since the transition number information is set so that the grant state is not determined by the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity, which grant state is based on the set transition number information and the number of games It is possible not to reduce the fun of predicting.

Feature C7. A specific notification means (a function of executing a table notification process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the transition number information selected by the selection means by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp which transition number information is selected by the specific notification, and based on the grasped transition number information, the timing to switch between the first game and the second game is set in advance. It is also possible to grasp the By doing so, it becomes easier to perform a game in which the first game and the second game are switched in relation to the given state.

Feature C8. The game according to feature C7, wherein the specific notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the specific notification when the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the grant determination is not won, the specific notification is made easier, so that the next grant determination is easily received in a high grant state, and the grant determination is won. It is possible to make it easier to do so, and it is possible to follow up well the player's disappointment due to the fact that the award determination is not won. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to win the grant determination only by specific notification without changing the configuration of the winning probability of the grant determination or the timing of transition of the grant state, even if the grant determination is not won. Since it is possible, it is possible to compensate for non-winning without changing complicated processing, and even if there is a situation where the above-mentioned winning probability or transition timing cannot be changed, the compensation It is possible to do

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the second game is more advantageous for the player than the first game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to bring about the advantage of switching to the second game. That is, although the transition of the grant state does not occur in the second game, since it is advantageous for the player, it is digested in the advantageous second game in the situation where it is predicted that the low grant state is expected, and the high grant state is reached. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property such as switching to the first game.

Feature C10. In the second game, the game base, which is the average value of the difference between the game value (bet number) used in the game and the game value (payout number) given as a result of the game, is higher than that in the first game. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is set to be higher.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature C9. That is, it is the structure which materialized the difference of the advantage degree of a 1st game and a 2nd game by a game base. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which a difference in the advantages of both games is provided based on such a game base, excellent effects of the feature C9 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature C11. Features C1 to C10 characterized in that execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is permitted in the first game, while execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted in the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, when switching to the second game, the grant state does not change and the grant determination is not performed. With such a configuration, the second game has a strong impression as a discard game for receiving an advantageous award determination in the first game, and there is a concern that the playability of the second game may be lowered. In that respect, as in the above feature C1, since the state determination means can grasp the transition of the grant state in advance and grasp the grant state even in the second game, the playability in the second game is more suitable. can be increased to

In addition, the invention described in the features C1 to C11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C11, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Giving determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) that can execute grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player when a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs; ,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (main controller 101 switching to AT mode) the ability to perform actions that cause a transition);
Giving setting means (for special notification by the display control device 81) capable of setting the ease of giving the privilege by using the specific information that the result of the giving judgment by the giving judgment means did not correspond to the giving correspondence result function to perform processing) and
with
The provision setting means uses the specific information when the game that caused the determination opportunity is the first game, and the game that causes the determination opportunity is the second game that is different from the first game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to change the ease with which the privilege is given when the specific information is used when the game is a game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and finished based on an end operation, when a predetermined judgment opportunity occurs, the player is determined whether or not to grant a privilege, and if the result of the grant determination is a failure result that does not correspond to the grant of the privilege, the grant setting means uses the specific information corresponding to the failure result Since the ease with which a privilege is granted is set, a so-called ceiling function can be realized using the result of grant determination.

On top of that, when the game that caused the judgment opportunity was the first game and when it was the second game, the ease of granting the privilege when the grant judgment at the judgment opportunity was a wrong result , the easiness of giving the privilege is set differently. By doing so, it is possible to realize the ceiling function by using not only the result of grant judgment but also the game that causes the judgment opportunity, and it is possible to diversify the game until reaching the ceiling. becomes.

Feature D2. The probability that the grant correspondence result is obtained in the grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger that occurred in the first game, and the grant by the grant determination means that is based on the determination trigger that occurred in the second game The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the grant correspondence result in the determination is common.

According to the above configuration, in the first game and the second game, if the provision determination is not won, the provision setting means sets the ease of granting the privilege differently, but the provision determination The winning probability itself is a common configuration. That is, in which game the determination opportunity is generated, only the so-called contribution to the ceiling is different. As a result, the ceiling function can be realized without using a complicated configuration such as different winning probabilities by the grant determination means.

In addition, regarding "the probability and the probability are common", "the probability and the probability are the same", or "the probability and the probability are the same". . . is a probability that is approximately the same as the probability." In this case, the "substantially the same probability" does not have to be exactly the same probability, but may be a probability difference to the extent that the player cannot perceive the difference.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the first game and the second game can be selected by a player's selection operation.

According to the above configuration, the player selects the game itself that causes the determination opportunity while assuming that the transition determination is not won, and the attention of the game is improved through active participation in the game. .

Feature D4. In at least one of the first game and the second game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted, and the determination trigger occurs in either the first game or the second game. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein

According to the above configuration, execution of grant determination is restricted in at least one of the first game and the second game, but a determination opportunity can occur in both the first game and the second game. That is, after the determination opportunity is generated in the first game or the second game, for any game of the first game or the second game, instead of the first game or the second game, then grant determination is performed, depending on which game caused the judgment trigger, the contribution to the ceiling that the result of the grant judgment based on the judgment trigger was out is different. It becomes possible to realize

Feature D5. While the execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted in the first game and the second game, the determination opportunity may occur in either the first game or the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to the above configuration, although execution of grant determination is restricted in the first game and the second game, a determination opportunity may occur. In other words, after the determination opportunity is generated in the first game or the second game, the determination opportunity is given in any game in the gaming property such that the grant determination is performed instead of the first game or the second game. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that the degree of contribution to the ceiling that the result of the grant determination based on the determination trigger is wrong depends on whether the result is generated.

Feature D6. When a predetermined first transition condition is satisfied, the game is shifted to a first special game state in which the first game is played, and when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, the first special game state is established. First transition means for ending the special game state (function for executing processing for starting and ending the first BB state in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A second special game state in which the second game is played based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition, and in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from that of the first special game state. Second transition means (for starting and ending the second BB state in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts and ends the second special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second end condition function to perform processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, with respect to the judgment opportunity generated during the so-called bonus such as the first special game state and the second special game state having different degrees of advantage for the player, the judgment opportunity depends on which bonus the judgment opportunity is generated. The degree of succession to the ceiling when it is out in the grant determination based on is different. By doing so, in addition to the conventional game characteristics such as which bonus is used to receive a profit, the weight of the bonus type such that the contribution to the ceiling differs depending on which bonus is used to generate the judgment trigger It is possible to contribute to the enhancement of the interest of the game by making the attachment more profound.

Feature D7. Bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount (function for executing processing for setting the bet amount by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the first game and the second game are games in which the same number of bets is set.

According to the above configuration, although the first game and the second game are games with the same number of bets, the case where the judgment opportunity is generated in the first game and the case where the judgment opportunity is generated in the second game , the contribution to the ceiling is different when the judgment result is out. By adopting such a configuration, in a configuration in which the player can select in which game the judgment opportunity is generated, the importance of the degree of contribution to the ceiling increases, and the game performance of the characteristic D1 increases. Increased interest.

Feature D8. Bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount (function for executing processing for setting the bet amount by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the first game and the second game are games in which different numbers of bets are set.

According to the above configuration, the number of bets differs between the first game and the second game, and depending on whether the first game or the second game causes the decision opportunity, When the determination result is out, the contribution to the ceiling is different. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make good use of the association between the degree of contribution to the ceiling and the number of bets to increase interest.

Feature D9. The second game is more advantageous for the player than the first game. ),
The provision setting means uses the specific information when the game that causes the determination opportunity is the first game, and the game that causes the determination opportunity is the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine can be set so that the privilege is more likely to be awarded than when the specific information is used when the player is a player.

According to the above configuration, the ceiling function is set so that the award is more likely to be granted when the judgment opportunity is generated in a game that is disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to realize different game characteristics, such as whether the current award determination is performed in the second game, which is advantageous, or the first game in anticipation of not winning, and the variety of games. is planned.

Feature D10. In the second game, the game base, which is the average value of the difference between the game value (bet number) used in the game and the game value (payout number) given as a result of the game, is higher than that in the first game. The gaming machine according to feature D9, which is set to be high.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature D9. That is, it is the structure which materialized the difference of the advantage degree of a 1st game and a 2nd game by a game base. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which a difference in the advantages of both games is provided based on such a game base, excellent effects of the feature D9 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D11. Special notification means (function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means for making the grant determination by the grant determination means advantageous for the player is provided. ,
According to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the provision setting means sets the ease with which the privilege is given by setting the ease with which the special notification is executed by the special notification means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the provision setting means does not change the probability of the provision determination by the provision determination means, but executes a special notification for favorably performing the provision determination, thereby facilitating the provision of benefits. It becomes the structure which implement|achieves a ceiling function. By doing so, even if there is a reason that the probability of grant determination cannot be changed, the ceiling function can be installed, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the game.

Feature D12. A high grant state in which the determination result of grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant correspondence result, and a low grant state in which the grant correspondence result is less likely to be the grant correspondence result than the high grant state are set,
The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the special notification means can execute notification corresponding to the high award state or the low award state as the special notification.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of the feature D11. That is, when the state in which the grant determination is performed has a high grant state and a low grant state, it is advantageous for the player to receive the grant determination based on the determination trigger in the high grant state. Therefore, by configuring the notification corresponding to such a high grant state and low grant state as a special notification, it is possible to grasp which grant state is staying, and to generate a judgment opportunity. Through this, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the grant determination and being granted the privilege.

Feature D13. As game states, a specific state (advantageous section) in which granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is allowed, and a normal state (normal section) in which granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is restricted are set. cage,
When the specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, initialization means for executing initialization processing of various information used in the specific state (initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101 function),
This game machine is
A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the application determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the application setting means and the special notification means. and
The gaming machine according to feature D11 or feature D12, wherein the second control device includes storage means (a trigger through counter) capable of storing the specific information across the specific states.

According to the above configuration, grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, a specific state in which a privilege can be granted, and a normal state in which the grant of the privilege is restricted are set, and when transitioning from the specific state to the normal state Since the various information used in the specific state is initialized, the information in the specific state is not carried over to the normal state, and assuming that the game starts from the normal state, that Fairness among players is ensured at the start. On the other hand, this excessive attempt to ensure fairness increases the possibility that the game will end when the specific state ends, and there is concern about a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, even though it is assumed that the initialization process is performed at the end of the specific state as described above, the specific information that the grant determination used for setting the special notification as the ceiling function was not won is the specific state , it is possible to associate each specific state with the special notification. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game across the specific state, and it is also possible to achieve a ceiling across the specific state.

The inventions described in the features D1 to D13 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D13, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A bet amount operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting the game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount based on the operation of the bet amount operating means (function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101);
A game can be started by setting the bet amount by the bet amount setting means, and a game starting means for starting the game based on a start operation by the player (the main controller 101 executes the processing of steps S207 to S211) function) and
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Grant determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player when a predetermined determination trigger (specific trigger) occurs;
If the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant of the privilege, privilege grant means that can grant a privilege to the player (transition to AT mode by main controller 101) function to perform processing) and
with
a first bet amount (3 bet) is set by the bet amount setting means, and an allowable state in which execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is allowed; 2 The number of bets is set, and a restricted state is set in which the execution of the grant determination is restricted,
The bet number setting means
a first bet amount setting means for setting the first bet amount when the bet amount operating means is operated;
a second bet amount setting means for setting the second bet amount when the bet amount operating means is operated;
When the bet amount operation means is operated based on a predetermined switching opportunity, the first bet amount setting means sets the bet amount (the state where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter). ) and a state in which the bet amount is set by the second bet amount setting means (a state in which 2 is input to the MAX bet counter). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for switching a MAX bet counter.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the setting of the number of bets by the player and the start operation, the game is finished based on the end operation, and the player is given a privilege when a predetermined judgment opportunity occurs. In a game machine such as a slot machine, in which a determination is made as to whether or not to grant a benefit, and a privilege is granted when the result of the grant determination is a grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant of the privilege, according to the number of bets in the game. Since the allowable state in which the execution of grant judgment is permitted and the restricted state in which the execution of grant judgment is restricted are set, while allowing multiple numbers of bets, the game related to grant judgment is limited. , it is possible to make it difficult for a player to commit a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a privilege by using the difference in the number of bets.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the bet amount operating means is operated, there are cases where the first bet amount is set as the allowable state, and there are cases where the second bet amount is set as the restricted state. When an opportunity arises, it is configured such that which bet number is set is switched. In this way, while the game is normally based on the first bet number that allows the execution of the grant determination, for example, for some reason, the situation is such that the execution of the grant determination should be restricted while proceeding. In some cases, it is possible to use the configuration related to the above-described restricted state that defines the relationship between the number of bets and the grant determination, such as making the game with the second number of bets, to improve the game playability. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature E2. A separate bet amount operation means (credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) is provided separately from the bet amount operation means and performs a game bet amount setting operation,
The second bet amount can be set by operating the separate bet amount operation means in a state where the first bet amount is set by the first bet amount setting means, and the second bet amount is set. The game according to feature E1, wherein the first bet amount can be set by operating the separate bet amount operating means in a state where the second bet amount is set by the setting means. machine.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the bet amount to be set when the bet amount operation means is operated by the switching means, the bet amount of the other side can be changed by operating the separate bet amount operation means. can be set. In other words, the player is free to decide which bet amount to set to play the game regardless of the situation, and the switching means is used to prompt the player to set the bet amount according to the game content. By doing this, it is possible to limit the switching of the bet amount and the determination of granting to the extent that the real pleasure of the so-called slot machine, such as deciding the bet amount by one's own intention and starting and ending the game by one's own operation, is not lost. It is possible to apply the presence/absence to playability.

Feature E3. Transition determination means (function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
When the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result that enables transition to the special game state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition response result, the transition to the special game state is performed. , a special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) that ends the special game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
with
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the switching opportunity is not generated by transition to the special game state.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the number of bets is not changed in accordance with the transition to the special game state as a so-called bonus state. By doing so, the bet amount is switched regardless of whether or not there is a transition to the special game state, and furthermore, by switching the bet amount, there is a case where the bet amount is switched to a restricted state in which the granting of benefits is restricted. It is possible to realize novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past.

Feature E4. Transition determination means (function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
When the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result that enables transition to the special game state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition response result, the transition to the special game state is performed. , a special transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) that ends the special game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
with
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the result corresponding to the transition, the second bet amount is set by the first bet amount setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the switching opportunity to the state in which the first bet amount is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the restricted state is switched to the allowable state by winning the transition correspondence result that enables the transition to the special game state as a so-called bonus state. In other words, the state in which the second bet limit is recommended before the transitional result is won, and the first bet allowed state is recommended in the event of the transitional result being won. By doing so, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past, such as automatically switching the number of bets when winning as a result of transition correspondence, and allowing execution of award judgment. Become.

Feature E5. In the game in which the second bet amount is set, transition to the special game state is possible, while in the game in which the first bet amount is set, transition to the special game state is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the game with the second bet number is switched to the game with the first bet number based on the win as a result of the transition response result, the transition to the special game state due to the win as a result of the transition response does not occur. In other words, by switching the number of bets, the game shifts to a game in which winnings are carried over as a result of transition corresponding to a so-called bonus. By carrying over the transition response result win, when the situation becomes that the transition response result win should be established, compared to the configuration where the transition response result win is waited from there, the transition response result win can be achieved earlier. There is an advantage that it can be established. Here, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which a win as a result of the transition corresponding to the first bet amount is possible, and then a win as a result of the transition corresponding to the first bet amount is carried over without switching the number of bets. However, with such a configuration, in the case of playing a game that receives a grant determination at the first number of bets, the transition response result is always displayed before the above-described transition response result win is established. It is necessary to force the player to play the game to avoid winning, and there is a risk that the smooth progress of the game will be hindered. In this regard, with the above configuration, after switching to the first number of bets, the transition-response result win is not established. Benefits can be enjoyed.

Feature E6. Transition determination means (function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
When the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result that enables transition to the special game state, and the end operation corresponds to the transition response result, the transition to the special game state is performed. , special transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for terminating the special game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein, in the special game state, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to a special game state as a so-called bonus state occurs, execution of grant determination is restricted. In other words, grant determination is performed in a situation where the number of bets is the first and the state is not the special game state. In this way, without excessively increasing the superiority of the special game state as a so-called bonus state, the game is played while expecting the grant determination, which is different from the conventional game property that tends to wait for the special game state. It is possible to realize sexuality. In addition, with the above configuration, for example, in a situation in which it is not desired to perform a grant determination, not only is the first bet amount switched to the second bet amount, but also a transition to a special game state is caused. However, it is possible to limit the execution of grant determination. Therefore, the presence/absence of restrictions on grant determination can be used to enhance the game playability, which can also be used to improve the interest in the game.

Feature E7. means for setting the second bet amount by the second bet amount setting means when the bet amount operating means is operated based on the end of the special game state; The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the restricted state is set even after the end of the special game state as a so-called bonus state. By doing so, the special game state and the state after the end of the special game state become a state in which collective grant determination is restricted. Therefore, for example, in creating a game while associating the state in which the grant determination is limited with the number of bets or a special game state, such as performing an effect using the collective state, it can be useful for improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Feature E8. Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the result of transition correspondence, the second bet amount is set by the first bet amount setting means. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the switching opportunity to the state in which the first bet amount is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the special game state and the subsequent state in which the grant determination is limited are terminated by winning of the transition response result that enables transition to the special game state. By doing so, after switching to the game in which the transfer response result is won and the transition is made to the special game state and the grant determination is limited, the special game state ends and the transition determination is allowed. Instead, it is configured to switch to a game in which grant determination is allowed after making a situation where it is possible to win again as a result of transition correspondence and to cause a transition to a special game state, and to cause a transition to the special game state. It is possible to maintain the situation. As a result, if the transition to the special game state is to be caused in order to limit the award judgment, it is possible to cause the transition to the special game state earlier without waiting for the win as a result of transition correspondence. , it is possible to suitably realize the game property of avoiding the grant determination by causing the transition to the special game state.

Feature E9. A special effect executing means (a function of executing a process for performing a bonus state effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the special game state by a predetermined effect means,
Characteristic feature E8 characterized in that the special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect until the result of transition determination by the transition determination means becomes the transition response result after the end of the special game state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature E8, the continuation of the special effect allows the player to accept the continuation of the restricted state even after the special game state without any sense of incongruity. This makes it possible to expect the effect of the feature E8 more preferably.

The inventions described in the features E1 to E9 are known as "a type of gaming machine such as a pachinko machine and a slot machine. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E9, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (AT mode shift) by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main controller 101) for causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
with
A lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and corresponding information as the specific information associated with the special result so that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery becomes the specific result is different. 1 specific state (first mode) and a second specific state (second mode) are set,
State transitions between the first specific state and the second specific state are performed between a permitted game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted and the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set so that it can occur both in a restricted game (for example, a two-bet game) in which execution is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, the first specific state and the second specific state are different from each other in correspondence information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game so that the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific phenomenon. Since two specific states are provided, even if a specific lottery is performed using the same special result and the same specific information, winning is possible in the first specific state but not in the second specific state. Such an event can occur. Then, according to the specific information obtained in advance, the game determines whether it is better to receive the specific lottery in the first specific state or the specific lottery in the second specific state even if the same special result is obtained. It is also possible to grasp it on the machine side.

In addition, in the above configuration, an allowable game that is allowed to execute a specific lottery and an allowable game that is restricted are set, and the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is the allowable game and the restricted game. It is possible to win the specific lottery by providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the specific information obtained in advance shifts to the specific state where it becomes the corresponding information. On the contrary, it is also possible to disqualify the specific lottery by providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the specific information obtained in advance shifts to a specific state where it does not become the corresponding information. . By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability using the pre-obtained specific information and the lottery result of the game.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the specific lottery means acquires the specific information obtained by the specific information obtaining means in a predetermined game and stored in the specific information storage means, and The specific lottery can be executed by using the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game, which is the game of (1). It can be further clarified that a specific lottery may be performed in relation to the game result.

It should be noted that the ``specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information'' may be expressed as ``specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information'', can be expressed as a specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information. Such changes in representation are also applicable to other features and other feature groups.

Feature F2. Characteristic feature F1 characterized by comprising switching operation means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) capable of executing switching between the permitted game and the restricted game based on the player's operation. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player himself/herself can select and switch between the permitted game and the restricted game. By doing so, it is possible to realize novel gameplay such that the player decides whether or not to consume the pre-obtained specific information in relation to the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. A bet amount operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting the game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting the game bet amount based on the operation of the bet amount operating means (function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main controller 101);
with
A game in which a first bet amount (3 bet) is set by the bet amount setting means is included in the allowable game, and a game in which a second bet amount different from the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. is included in the restricted game, the gaming machine according to feature F2.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature F2. In particular, as described above, by setting the number of bets for a game in a so-called slot machine, it is possible to switch between the permitted game and the restricted game, thereby adding a new configuration for the switching operation. Therefore, the effect of the feature F2 can be obtained by making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature F4. Specific notification means (hold display processing by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification (hold display) of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the specific information that has been acquired in advance based on the specific notification, so whether the specific information is in a specific state that will be the corresponding information when the specific information is provided to the specific lottery. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether the As a result, switching between the restricted game and the permitted game, that is, attention to whether or not the specific information is consumed can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature F5. The specific notification is updated based on the specific information being obtained by the specific information obtaining means, and the specific information stored by the specific information storage means is used for the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature F4, further comprising update means (function for executing pending shift processing by the display control device 81) capable of updating the specific notification based on the fact.

According to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not the specific information is updated, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific information is consumed, and to know whether it is a restricted game or an allowed game. In this way, while predicting and grasping the corresponding information from the contents of the specific information grasped from the specific notification, it is possible to easily play the game of predicting the specific state in which the specific information is given to the specific lottery. becomes possible.

Feature F6. Special notification means that can execute special notification corresponding to the first specific state or the second specific state by a predetermined notification means (first mode effect or second mode effect by the display control device 81, first A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for performing a mode prediction effect or a second mode prediction effect.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp which specific state the vehicle is in based on the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to facilitate the prediction of the specific state when the pre-acquired specific information is given to the specific lottery.

Feature F7. The special notification means is a first special notification means capable of executing, as the special notification, notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed (first mode effect by the display control device 81 or second mode effect). A gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for producing an effect.

According to the above configuration, the special notification indicates whether the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. By doing so, when a specific lottery for specific information is held, it is possible to predict and grasp whether or not the specific lottery will be won from the specific state. In a configuration where there is regularity in the transition from the current specific state, the future transition to the specific state is predicted, and based on the prediction, the content of the specific lottery for the specific information obtained in advance It is also possible to predict and grasp the By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability using the special notification.

Feature F8. The special notification means is a second special notification means (first mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing, as the special notification, notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed. A gaming machine according to feature F6 or feature F7, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for performing a predicted effect or a second mode predicted effect.

According to the above configuration, the special notification indicates whether the game after the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp in advance the specific state when the specific lottery for the specific information obtained in advance is performed, and it is possible to predict and grasp the contents of the specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability using the special notification.

Feature F9. The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a specific number of the specific information, which is a plurality of numbers,
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the predetermined number is less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the special notification by the second special notification means as the notification suggesting the future specific state corresponds to the specific state after the number of games played less than the upper limit number of the specific information pre-acquired and stored. be notified. By doing so, after grasping the specific state in relation to the specific information obtained in advance, the content of the specific lottery is predicted and grasped from the balance of whether or not the specific information is consumed depending on whether it is a restricted game or not. A game can be favorably performed.

Feature F10. The special notification means is
A first special notification means (processing for performing a first mode effect or a second mode effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification function) and
The special notification means is a second special notification means (first mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing, as the special notification, notification suggesting a specific state of the game after a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed. A function to execute processing for performing prediction effects and second mode prediction effects);
with
The special notification by the second special notification means is set so that the reliability of the notification corresponding to the specific state is higher than the special notification by the first special notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F9.

According to the above configuration, the current specific state is easier to grasp than the future specific state. By doing so, it becomes possible to ascertain the transition of the specific state at an early stage, and it becomes a preferable configuration for switching between the restricted game and the permitted game.

It should be noted that "there is a high reliability that the notification corresponds to the specific state" means, for example, "there is a high probability that the notification corresponds to the specific state", or "the content indicated by the special notification It can also be expressed as, "It is likely to be a corresponding notification." In addition, "first special notification means" and "second special notification means" are configured to execute "special notification" through "predetermined lottery", and "predetermined lottery by the first special notification means may be set so that the probability of winning the predetermined lottery by the second special notification means is higher than the probability of winning the lottery. In this case, on the "first special notification means" side, the "special notification" is executed after the "predetermined lottery", while on the "second special notification means" side, the "special notification" is executed without the "predetermined lottery". It may be configured to execute "notification".

Feature F11. Any of the features F6 to F10, wherein the special notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the special notification when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is not the specific result. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific lottery does not become the specific result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the specific event did not occur. As a result, it becomes easier to play a game that determines the type of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to follow up well the decrease in the player's desire to play when the specific result is not obtained.

Feature F12. A plurality of stages are set for setting values that can change the rate of increase or decrease or mode of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the special notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F10, characterized in that execution rates of special notifications are different.

According to the above configuration, a setting difference is provided in the execution rate of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to change the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game medium by using the special notification corresponding to the type of the specific state, thereby contributing to the diversification of the game.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F12, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification in the restricted game.

According to the above configuration, the special notification corresponding to the type of specific state is performed in a restricted game and in a situation where the specific information is not consumed. By doing so, for example, if the restricted game is switched to the permitted game and the specific information is given to the specific lottery, the regularity of the transition of the specific state, etc. Attracting the player's attention including the presence or absence of switching between restricted games and allowed games, such as being able to predict that the specific information is provided to a specific lottery as correspondence information corresponding to a specific state. becomes possible.

Feature F14. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F13, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification in the allowable game.

According to the above configuration, the special notification corresponding to the type of the specific state is performed in a situation where the specific information is consumed in the allowable game. By doing so, for example, if the specific information is not consumed by switching from the permitted game to the restricted game, when the pre-acquired specific information is given to the specific lottery, the correspondence corresponding to the specific state It is possible to attract the player's attention, including the presence or absence of switching between the restricted game and the permitted game, such as making it possible to wait for consumption until information becomes available.

Feature F15. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F14, wherein the special notification means makes it easier to execute the special notification in the restricted game than in the permitted game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted by using the execution rate of the special notification. In particular, since execution of the special lottery is restricted in the restricted game, it is considered that the player who wants to receive the special lottery wants to play the allowed game rather than the restricted game as much as possible. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the special notification reminds us of the importance of the game that waits for consumption in the restricted game until the specific information that has been acquired in advance corresponds to the specific state. It is possible to preferably suppress switching to the permitted game due to exhaustion of the numbness before the desired specific state is reached despite the fact that the player is playing the game.

The inventions described in the features F1 to F15 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F15, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (AT mode shift) by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main controller 101) for causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
with
A lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and correspondence information as the specific information associated with the special result so that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery becomes the specific result is provided in advance. It differs depending on the number of games (advantageous section game number AG) from a predetermined start opportunity,
As the game from the predetermined start opportunity, an allowable game (for example, a 3-bet game) in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is allowed, and a restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. (for example, a 2-bet game), and a gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, the correspondence information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game so that the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is the number of games played from the predetermined start opportunity. Therefore, even if a specific lottery is performed using the same special result and the same specific information, there may or may not be a winning result depending on the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity. You will get

In addition, in the above configuration, an allowable state in which execution of a specific lottery is permitted and an allowable state in which execution of a specific lottery is permitted are set as a game that can be executed from a predetermined start opportunity, and the specific information obtained in advance is the corresponding information. By providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until the number of games reaches a certain number, it is possible to win the specific lottery. By providing the specific information to the specific lottery after waiting until then, it is possible to disqualify the specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability using the pre-obtained specific information and the lottery result of the game.

Feature G2. Regardless of the number of games from the predetermined start opportunity, the specific lottery result associated with the special result in each number of games so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means becomes the specific result is common The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein correspondence information is set.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the corresponding information is set according to the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity, the corresponding information is set so that the probability of winning the specific lottery does not differ regardless of the number of games played. . If the probability of winning a specific lottery is made different, in a configuration in which restricted games and allowed games are provided, an event may occur in which a predetermined number of games should be allowed games regardless of the correspondence information in the first place. You will get In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, switching between the restricted game and the permitted game can be enjoyed purely in relation to the specific information acquired in advance.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result is set to be common regardless of the number of games played from the predetermined start opportunity. .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the corresponding information is set according to the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity, the probability itself of obtaining a special result in each game is set so as not to differ regardless of the number of games played. By doing so, the phenomenon of changing the winning rate of the specific lottery due to the difference in the probability of obtaining a special result does not occur, so the relationship between the restricted game and the allowable specific information is purely related to the specific information obtained in advance. It is possible to entertain the switching with the game.

Feature G4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A mode result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be given a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode wins,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification execution means and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed are set,
The predetermined start opportunity is generated based on the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the specific event is an event that causes the mode notification to be performed by the mode notification executing means.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a prize in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. Based on such game characteristics, specific information that wins a specific lottery that causes a specific event such as performing the mode notification according to the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state where the mode notification is possible. Since they are set differently, it is possible to realize a novel game feature such as predicting in advance the occurrence of mode notification based on the relationship between the specific information obtained in advance and the number of games played. Moreover, since the game in which the specific information obtained in advance is consumed and the game in which it is not consumed can be executed, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the predicted mode notification changes depending on the game executed by the player thereafter. configuration. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the fun of the game using the mode notification.

Feature G5. Advantageous state notification means (secondary indicator as a section indicator) for starting advantageous state notification based on the transition to the advantageous state and the establishment of a predetermined notification condition, and ending the advantageous state notification when the advantageous state ends 8 display segment N8),
The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the gaming machine is set so that the predetermined notification condition may not be established when the predetermined start opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature G4, which assumes the playability by the mode notification, the advantageous state notification is performed during the advantageous state, and the advantageous state notification is set to end when the advantageous state ends. Therefore, by confirming the advantageous state notification, the player can clearly grasp whether or not the advantageous state continues (whether or not the advantageous state ends). As a result, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who can identify whether or not the advantageous state continues from other information and a player who cannot, and the soundness of the game is improved. In addition, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, there are cases where the advantageous state notification is started and cases where it is not. More specifically, the start of the advantageous state notification is on standby until a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. be done. In this way, it is suppressed that the transition to the advantageous state is completely obvious in the game property aiming at the advantageous state, and the game property is not impaired while improving the soundness of the game. be able to. Then, by applying such a configuration to the present invention in which correspondence information for winning a specific lottery is set differently depending on the number of games played after the shift to the advantageous state occurs, it is possible to achieve the advantageous state. It becomes difficult to understand the number of games played after the shift occurs, and as a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty of the prediction game of the corresponding information. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by using the relationship between the specific information obtained in advance and whether or not the specific information is consumed.

Feature G6. Predetermined notification means (auxiliary Equipped with a special notification means that can be executed by the display unit 65) (a function of executing special notification processing and pending display processing by the display control device 81),
Any one of the characteristics G1 to G5, characterized in that the execution probability of the special notification by the special notification means is set so as to change according to the number of games played after the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the correspondence information associated with the special result is different according to the number of games played, and furthermore, in the game property in which it is possible to execute games with different consumption of specific information, the number of games played and the correspondence information Since a special notification indicating the relationship may be made, the player can decide whether or not to consume the specific information based on the special notification, thereby improving the winning probability of the specific lottery. Since the execution probability of the special notification is set to change according to the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity, the special notification can be used to change the winning probability of the specific lottery. . As a result, there is no need to change the correspondence information or the probability of a special outcome, etc., so there is no need to complicate the configuration. To change the winning probability of a specific lottery even in a certain game machine.

Feature G7. A game number information storage means (various table storage area 182a by the display control device 81) for storing a plurality of game number information (mode transition table) for setting the relationship between the game number and the correspondence information;
Selection means capable of executing a selection process for selecting one piece of game number information from the game number information stored in the game number information storage means (function for executing a process for setting a mode transition table by the display control device 81 )When,
with
The specific lottery means grasps the corresponding information corresponding to the number of games from the number-of-games information selected by the selection means and executes the specific lottery,
The selection means is characterized in that it is configured to execute the selection process based on the number of games played after execution of the selection process becomes a predetermined specific number of games (100 games). The game machine according to any one of G1 to G6.

According to the above configuration, every time the number of games reaches the specific number of games, the number-of-games information defining the relationship between the number of games played and the correspondence information is updated. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game using the relationship between the number of games played and the corresponding information. However, there is a possibility that the unfavorable number-of-games information is updated to other number-of-games information by at least completing the specific number of games. Also, since the preferable specific game number information can be updated by completing the specific game number, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein in the permitted game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is permitted, while in the restricted game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is restricted. .

According to the above configuration, not only the specific lottery, but also the update of the number-of-games information that determines the specific information (correspondence information) used for the specific lottery is restricted in the restricted game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent wasteful processing such as updating of the number-of-games information only although the specific lottery is not performed.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the selection process by the selection means is set to be executed before the specific lottery is performed by the specific lottery means in one game.

According to the above configuration, while avoiding the update of the game number information by the restricted game, when the desired number of games is reached, a specific lottery using the game number information before the update is performed as an allowable game. You can make it harder to do.

Feature G10. Special notification means capable of executing special notification (first mode prediction effect, second mode prediction effect and pending display) indicating the relationship between the number of games played and the corresponding information by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) Equipped with (a function of executing special notification processing and pending display processing by the display control device 81),
a means capable of limiting the execution of the special notification after the number of games after the selection process is executed reaches the specific number of games, at least until the selection process is executed after the number of games reaches the specific number of games; The game machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the correspondence information associated with the special result is different according to the number of games played, and furthermore, in the game property in which it is possible to execute games with different consumption of specific information, the number of games played and the correspondence information Since a special notification indicating the relationship may be made, the player can decide whether or not to consume the specific information based on the special notification, thereby improving the winning probability of the specific lottery. Moreover, after that, although the number-of-games information is updated, the special notification is set so as not to be executed based on the information before the update, so that the executed special notification does not match the actual contents. event will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play due to a decrease in credibility of the special notification.

The inventions described in the features G1 to G10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G10, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features H1 to H8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in the main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (AT mode shift) by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main controller 101) for causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
with
A restricted game (for example, a two-bet game) is set in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted,
The specific information obtaining means obtains the specific information when the predetermined number of the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the obtaining condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined number of pieces of the specific information are stored in the storage means, the specific information is not acquired.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Then, in the above configuration, on the premise that a limited game in which the specific lottery is restricted may be performed, the specific information acquisition means stores a predetermined number, which is the upper limit number, in the specific information storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. Specific information is acquired when no specific information is stored, while specific information is not acquired when a predetermined number of specific information, which is the upper limit number, is stored. Even if there is a situation in which the specific information is not consumed due to lack of information, a relatively simple configuration may cause inconveniences such as the specific information exceeding the upper limit being acquired or the specific information being overwritten. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific information obtaining means can obtain the specific information when the obtaining condition is satisfied in the restricted game.

As in the above configuration, even though the specific information is not consumed in the restricted state, if the specific information can be obtained, only the specific information can be obtained in a situation where the specified number of specific information is not stored. It is possible to do it. As a result, for example, when the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased, the specific information can be stored with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H3. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion port 45) for setting the game bet amount,
In the game started with the first bet amount (3 bet) set by the bet amount setting means, the specific lottery may be performed by the specific lottery means, while the bet amount setting means may set the first bet amount and the first bet amount. The game according to feature H2 is characterized in that, in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bets) set, it becomes the restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. machine.

According to the above configuration, if it is desired to obtain only the specific information without consuming it, all that is required is to set the bet number to the second bet number instead of the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to quickly store up to a predetermined number of pieces of specific information with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H4. The game state is changed to normal based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB) and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that shifts from the game state to the special game state and terminates the special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition,
In the game in the normal game state, the specific lottery can be performed by the specific lottery means, while in the game in the special game state, the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is limited to the restricted game. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature H3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in order to obtain only the specific information without consuming it, it is necessary to shift the game state to a special game state as a so-called bonus state. Generally, when a transition to a special game state occurs, for example, information to that effect is output to the hall computer or data display of the game hall, or a bonus state effect is performed. It is conceivable that the game hall manager or the like can easily grasp that the transition to the game state has occurred. By doing so, for example, when undesirable specific information is stored, after erasing the specific information by some operation, if further specific information is to be accumulated, a transition to a special game state is caused. , the manager of the game hall can easily identify that the act is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to illegally acquire the specific information.

Feature H5. The game according to any one of features H2 to H4, wherein when a predetermined operation (operation of the reset switch 72) is performed, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased. machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means may be erased when a predetermined operation is performed. By applying the configuration of the feature H2 to such a gaming machine, it becomes possible to accumulate the specific information after erasing it, and then use it for a normal game.

It should be noted that the ``predetermined operation'' is defined as ``an operation of an operation means provided at a position where operation becomes possible when a predetermined unlocking operation is performed'', so that the player can freely erase the specific information. It is clarified that

Feature H6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A mode result (e.g., pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be given a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode wins,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification execution means and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed are set,
Means capable of erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the end of the advantageous state (function for executing initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101) ), the game machine according to any one of features H2 to H5.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a prize in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. On the premise of such playability, when the advantageous state in which mode notification is possible ends, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased, so that the specific information acquired in one advantageous state is eliminated. Independence of each advantageous state is ensured because the specific information obtained is not carried over across advantageous states. By applying the configuration of feature H2 to such a gaming machine, it becomes possible to reacquire the specific information in the normal state where the execution of the specific lottery may be restricted, and the state shifts again to the advantageous state. When doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the specific lottery cannot be received because the specific information is not accumulated.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the game in the normal state is included in a restricted game in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific information is not consumed in the normal state, but only acquired.

Feature H8. Lottery acquisition means for acquiring the specific information to be used in the current specific lottery out of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. (function for executing processing for shifting the AT counter to the execution area AE in the random number shift processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the acquisition condition is established after the specific information is acquired by the acquiring means at the time of lottery.

According to the above configuration, in each game, it is clarified that the specific information is consumed in the specific lottery and the specific information storage means becomes empty, and then the specific information is acquired. As a result, basically, the upper limit number of specific information is stored in the specific information storage means at the end of each game, and if the specific information is not consumed in the restricted game, the specific information is not acquired. is also clarified.

The inventions described in the features H1 to H8 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H8, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) capable of executing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the start operation;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result, a privilege granting means (payout determination by the main controller 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result function to perform processing) and
A gaming machine comprising
Specific lottery means (AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (shift to AT mode) advantageous to the player using the lottery results of the lottery means function) and
If the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (causes the transition to the AT mode by the main controller 101 function to execute processing for
In a gaming machine comprising
The specific lottery means executes the specific lottery using the result of the lottery by the lottery means, predetermined first information (mode transition table, AT counter) and second information (advantage zone game number AG). is the configuration,
When playing a game, first information updating means for updating the first information (a function for executing a lottery mode transition process and a random number shift process by the main control device 101);
second information updating means for updating the second information (function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101) when playing the game;
with
A first game (3-bet game) in which updating of the first information by the first information updating means is permitted, and a second game (2-bet game) in which updating of the first information is restricted are defined. and
The gaming machine is characterized in that updating of the second information by the second information updating means is permitted in both the first game and the second game.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery for the game is performed, the game is ended based on the end operation, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the lottery result. In gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, in which special prizes are given to players, there are cases where a specific lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a specific event that is advantageous to the player will occur using the results of the game lottery. Since a specific event occurs when a lottery is won, interest in the game can be improved by drawing attention not only to the lottery result of each game but also to the lottery result of the specific lottery.

In this case, the specific lottery means for performing the specific lottery is configured to perform the specific lottery using not only the lottery result of each game, but also the first information and the second information, but updating of the first information is permitted. The second information is updated in both the first game and the second game. Therefore, if the first game is played, the specific lottery is always performed using the updated first information and the second information, whereas if the second game is played, the first information is not used. Although the updated information is used, the non-updated second information is used. By doing so, for example, if the second information is desirable for the player, it is possible to avoid updating the second information in the second game while playing the game. If the second information is unfavorable for the player, it is possible to update the second information in the first game. In other words, compared to the case where both the first information and the second information are updated every game, by making it possible to restrict or allow the update of one of them, the combination of both information is dramatically less difficult to make desirable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability using the specific lottery.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the player can select which of the first game and the second game to play.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select between the first game in which the first information is updated and the second game in which the first information is not updated. Active participation of the players is urged, and interest in the game is enhanced.

Feature I3. It is characterized by having a special notification means (function for executing special notification processing and pending display processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing special notification corresponding to the first information by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the first information by the special notification, and determines whether the first game or the second game is acceptable according to the first information. is also possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in which the relationship between the first information and the second information or the relationship between the first game and the second game is applied to the specific lottery.

Feature I4. In the first game, while the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, in the second game, the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to the above configuration, it is necessary to play at least the first game in order to receive the specific lottery. In this case, in the second game, the combination of the first information and the second information is preferable for the player when updating the first information is restricted and only the second information is updated. In other words, when the second game is being played, there is a high possibility that the combination of the first information and the second information is not yet favorable to the player. . Therefore, as in the above configuration, in the second game, by configuring the specific lottery itself to be restricted, useless execution of the specific lottery can be avoided. In a configuration that requires new first information and second information by providing to Therefore, the first information and the second information before optimization are used, and the inconvenience of requiring re-optimization does not occur.

Feature I5. The first information updating means, every time a game is played, according to a predetermined first rule (each time the game is completed, the mode corresponding to the mode transition table is switched, the AT counter is shifted). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the first information is updated.

According to the above configuration, if the player understands the first rule, it is possible to predict the updated first information before updating the first information. By doing so, even in a situation where updating of the first information is restricted in the second game, it is possible to predict the first information to be updated in the first game.

Feature I6. The specific lottery means includes specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information (corresponding to the first mode and the second mode in the first embodiment, and the lottery mode in the second embodiment). The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the specific lottery is executed using the winning value of the AT counter) and the lottery result of the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in the specific lottery, the specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information is used instead of simply using the first information and the second information, so the second information side is always The significance of being updated is made clearer.

The inventions described in the features I1 to I6 are known as "a type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko machine and a slot machine. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features I1 to I6, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H8, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) capable of executing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player when the start operation is performed;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result, a privilege granting means (payout determination by the main controller 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result function to perform processing) and
A gaming machine comprising
Updating means for updating predetermined information (AT random number, advantageous interval game number AG) according to game progress )When,
Specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event advantageous to the player (transition to AT mode, addition, set stock) by using the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the predetermined information. (a function of executing AT lottery processing, AT addition processing, first specialized zone processing, and second specialized zone processing by main controller 101);
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (causes the transition to the AT mode by the main controller 101) processing, processing to add the number of games, processing to perform set stock) and
with
A first game (specific specified number of betting games) in which execution of the specific determination by at least the specific determination means is allowed, and a second game in which execution of the specific determination by at least the specific determination means is avoided (specific specified number bet games other than), and the player can select,
A predetermined lottery result as the lottery result by the lottery means, and specific information as the predetermined information updated by the update means (for example, an AT random number in the second numerical range, the last digit of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9), and avoiding execution of the specific determination using at least in the specific state (first specialized zone) in the second game is permitted in the first game. A first specific situation (situation in which the excess flag is not set) that is more advantageous to the player than
Execution of the specific determination using the predetermined lottery result and the specific information is more advantageous for the player to allow the execution of the specific determination in the first game in the specific state than to avoid it in the second game. 2 specific situations (situations in which the excess flag is set);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to exist.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery for the game is performed, the game is ended based on the end operation, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the lottery result. In a game machine such as a so-called slot machine, in which a privilege is given to a player, a specific event advantageous to the player is caused by using the game lottery result and predetermined information updated in accordance with the progress of the game. There are cases where a specific judgment is made as to whether or not, and if the specific judgment is won, a specific event will occur. Interest is improved. Moreover, since the specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event is performed using the lottery result by the lottery means and the predetermined information updated by the update means, in each game, the lottery result by the lottery means is simply used. It is completely different from conventional slot machines, such as association with the end operation, and novel game characteristics are realized using the relationship between the predetermined information and the lottery results of each game.

In this gaming machine, a first game in which execution of a specific determination is permitted and a second game in which execution of a specific determination is permitted are provided, and further, a predetermined lottery result of the same game as the specific information as the same predetermined information is provided. A first specific situation in which it is advantageous not to receive the specific judgment in the second game even when the specific judgment is made using and it is advantageous to receive the specific judgment in the first game. Since the second specific situation is set, it is simply a game that allows the player to expect that the predetermined information will be updated to be favorable for the player, or that the game lottery result will be favorable to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented interest by switching between execution and non-execution of a specific determination depending on the situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature J2. The specific information (first specific information to third specific information) corresponding to the predetermined information updated by the updating means and used for the specific determination when the game is played in the first game, the first game Described in feature J1, characterized in that it has a specific notification means that can be executed before it is performed (a function of executing processing for performing the first to third specific notifications by the display control device 81) game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined information can be grasped in advance by the notification by the specific notification means, the player can select whether to receive the specific judgment in the first game or avoid the specific judgment in the second game. It becomes possible. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize the playability of the feature J1 using the predetermined information.

Feature J3. When the specific determination is performed using the predetermined lottery result and the specific information, When the specific determination is performed using the predetermined lottery result and predetermined information different from the specific information The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the specified result is lower than that.

According to the above configuration, even in the specific determination using the same predetermined lottery result, using the specific information is less likely to result in a specific result than using other information, and the first specific situation is the specific situation. The second specific situation is a situation in which it is advantageous for the player to avoid the execution of a specific judgment that is unlikely to result in a specific result, and the second specific situation is a situation in which it is advantageous for the player to accept the specific judgment as it is even if the specific result is unlikely. Become. By adopting such a configuration, it is assumed that there is merit in avoiding specific judgments that are unlikely to result in specific results as much as possible, but in some cases, it is better to receive specific judgments as they are. It becomes possible for the player to perform such actions, and the amusement of the game property of receiving or avoiding specific judgments can be improved.

Feature J4. Characteristic J1 characterized by comprising a special notification means capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the second specific situation (a function of executing a process for performing an excess notification effect by the display control device 81). The game machine according to any one of J3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the execution of the specific determination using the specific information should be avoided in the second game, based on the presence or absence of execution of the special notification. This makes it easier for the player to play the game of selecting the first game and the second game.

Feature J5. Special notification lottery means (function for executing excess notification lottery processing by display control device 81) for performing the special notification lottery,
Characteristic feature J4, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification when the result of the notification lottery by the special notification lottery means is a response result corresponding to execution of the special notification. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even in the second specific situation, the special notification is not executed unless the result of the notification lottery by the special notification lottery means is the corresponding result. By doing so, the second specific situation such as the special notification can be made within the range that does not spoil the interest of predicting whether the execution of the specific determination is the first specific situation that should be avoided or the second specific situation that should be permitted. It is possible to notify the user of the specific situation.

Feature J6. The second specific situation is a situation in which even if the specific event is caused by the specific event means, the advantage for the player does not change or is difficult to change compared to the case where the specific event is not caused, and the second specific situation continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied,
When the second specific situation occurs, an end notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing an end notification (ending effect) corresponding to the establishment of the end condition after that from before the end condition is satisfied A function to execute the processing for the ending production by) and
When the end notification is performed by the end notification means, a means capable of limiting the execution of the special notification by the special notification means (an excess notification effect is performed when the ending effect is performed by the display control device 81) a function that executes processing to prevent
The gaming machine according to feature J4 or feature J5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the player can understand that it is meaningless to cause the specific event to occur any more due to the end notification. In that case, the special notification and the end notification may overlap, which may make the special notification rather annoying. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, execution of the special notification is restricted when the end notification is performed, and it becomes possible to clarify the role of each notification.

In addition, the special notification lottery means in the configuration of feature J5 may be configured such that the notification lottery is performed in each game, so that the special notification is not performed over multiple games. It is also possible to further clarify the difference from the above end notification.

Feature J7. Means capable of restricting the execution of the special notification by the special notification means in the specific state (function of executing processing to prevent execution of excess notification effect during the first special zone by the display control device 81 ), the gaming machine according to any one of features J4 to J6.

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the special notification corresponding to the second specific situation is restricted in the specific state in which the selection of whether to allow or avoid the execution of the specific determination is made, at least the specific state Before reaching , it is necessary to determine whether or not the situation is the second specific situation. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the game during the specific state but also to the game before that.

Feature J8. The case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a second predetermined result (a special combination as a rare combination) different from the first predetermined result (for example, normal reps A to C) is better than the case where the lottery result is a first predetermined result (for example, normal reps A to C). , a configuration that is likely to result in the identification result even in the identification determination using the same predetermined information,
The special notification means according to any one of characteristics J4 to J7, characterized in that the special notification means is easier to execute the special notification in a game in which the second predetermined result is obtained than in a game in which the first predetermined result is obtained. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined result is set as the lottery result of the game in which the result of the specific determination is likely to be the specific result, and it corresponds to the second specific situation that should be allowed without avoiding the execution of the specific determination. This special notification is more likely to be made in the game with the second predetermined result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set not only the special event but also the benefit of the special notification based on the fact that the second predetermined result is obtained, and it is possible to enrich the privilege of the second predetermined result. . Therefore, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the second predetermined result and make the player pay more attention to the lottery result of the game.

Feature J9. The second specific situation is a situation in which even if the specific event is caused by the specific event means, the advantage for the player does not change compared to the case where the specific event is not caused. The gaming machine according to feature J8.

With the above configuration, in the second specific situation, even if the second predetermined result is obtained, the player cannot receive any more benefit from the specific event. It can make you feel sad. In this respect, as described in feature J8, the second predetermined result facilitates the execution of the special notification, so that it can be used as a substitute for the benefit of the specific event.

Feature J10. A plurality of stages of set values are set that can cause changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game value, and setting means (main controller 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the special notification is executed. The game machine according to any one of features J4 to J9, characterized in that the easiness is different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to adjust the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game value by the execution rate of the special notification, and it is also possible to perform a set value prediction game from the execution rate of the special notification. .

Feature J11. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous section, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state has a configuration that can be continued over the number of games in a range that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit number of games,
The second specific situation is a first special situation (situation in which the first excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous state will be reached. Characteristic J1 to The gaming machine according to any one of J10.

According to the above configuration, in an advantageous state in which the upper limit number of games is determined, in a situation where it is confirmed that the advantageous state will continue up to the upper limit number of games, the number of games in the advantageous state is further increased. is meaningless. Therefore, in such a situation, by avoiding the execution of the specific determination and not making unnecessary determinations, the game progresses more smoothly.

Feature J12. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous section, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is configured so that the gaming value can be increased within a range that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit increase number,
The second specific situation is a second special situation (situation in which a second excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous state is reached or is likely to be reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in an advantageous state in which the upper limit increase number of the game value is determined, in a situation where it is understood that the game value is likely to increase up to the upper limit increase number, the advantageous state is further increased. It is meaningless to increase the number of games played. Therefore, in such a situation, by avoiding the execution of the specific determination and not making unnecessary determinations, the game progresses more smoothly.

Feature J13. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous section, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state can be continued over the number of games within a range not exceeding a predetermined upper limit number of games, and the game value can be increased within a range not exceeding the predetermined upper limit increase number. It is composed of
The second specific situation is a first special situation (situation in which the first excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous state will be reached, and the upper limit increase number in the advantageous state. Including a second special situation (situation where the second excess flag is set) that is known in advance to reach or is likely to reach,
Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to the second specific situation (function for executing processing for performing excess notification effect by display control device 81),
According to any one of characteristics J1 to J12, the special notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the special notification in the first special situation than in the second special situation. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in an advantageous state in which the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the game value is determined, it is confirmed that the advantageous state continues up to the upper limit number of games, or the game value increases up to the upper limit increase number. In a situation where it is understood that there is a high possibility of an increase, it is meaningless to further increase the number of games in an advantageous state. Therefore, in such a situation, by avoiding the execution of the specific determination and not making unnecessary determinations, the game progresses more smoothly.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of upper limit games can be reached in order to let the player decide whether or not the execution of the specific determination using the specific information should be avoided in the second game, based on whether or not the special notification is executed. It is easier to execute the special notification when it is grasped than when it is grasped that the upper limit increase number is reached. Although the number of games played matches the progress of the game in an advantageous state, there is a difference between the number of increases in the game value predicted in advance and the actual number of increases in the game value, depending on the content of the game. Therefore, even if it is understood that the upper limit of increase is reached, there is a possibility that the upper limit of increase will not be reached. Therefore, since the execution rate of the special notification is set as described above, it is possible to prevent the contradiction such that the upper limit increase number is not reached even though the special notification is performed.

Feature J14. A game number updating means (function for executing specialized zone count processing by the main control device 101) for updating the number of games that can be executed in the specific state;
When the number of games updated by the number-of-games update means is a specific number, specific end means for ending the specific state (a function of executing processing for ending the first specialized zone by the main controller 101);
with
The game number updating means updates the number of games when execution of the specific determination is permitted in the first game in the specific state, and executes the execution of the specific determination in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J13, wherein the game number is not updated when the second game is avoided.

According to the above configuration, in a specific state where the number of games ends when the number of games reaches a specific number, if the specific determination is avoided when the predetermined information is the specific information, the update of the number of games in the specific state is accordingly avoided. become. By doing so, even if the second game is played according to the updated predetermined information, the number of games in the specific state is not eroded in the second game, and the second game can be played with peace of mind. becomes possible.

Feature J15. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the player performs the first end operation, the first privilege is given, and when the player performs the second end operation different from the first end operation. is set with an operation response result that a second privilege different from the first privilege is granted or no privilege is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation corresponding result, the operation notification means (by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing the operation notification including the first end operation or the second end operation function to execute the process for performing the push order notification effect),
The specific determination means determines, as the specific event, an event that facilitates execution of the operation notification by the operation notification means or an event that increases the number of games that facilitates execution of the operation notification. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J14, characterized in that:

When the operation corresponding result is won, the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether the end operation is the first end operation or the second end operation, and the operation notification for the end operation is performed. The degree of advantage of the player greatly differs depending on whether or not. A specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event, such as making the operation notification easier to execute or increasing the number of games that are likely to be executed, is related to the player's degree of advantage, and the player is highly interested in it. be done. In such a configuration, it is advantageous to allow the execution of the specific determination by the first game, or it is advantageous to avoid it by the second game. It is possible to create a new playability that is not just aimed at increasing the number.

Feature J16. An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which execution of the operation notification by the operation notification means is permitted and a normal state (normal section) in which the operation notification by the operation notification means is not executed are set,
Advantageous termination means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when a predetermined specific termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (terminating the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to perform processing) and
Completion comprehension means capable of recognizing that the specific end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state before the specific end condition is satisfied (function for executing remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing by main controller 101) )When,
with
the first specific situation is a situation in which the completion grasping means does not grasp that the specific end condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to characteristic J15, wherein the second specific situation is a situation in which it is grasped by the end grasping means that the specific end condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the operation notification is performed by the operation notification means in an advantageous state, the specific determination that causes the specific event that the operation notification is likely to be performed or the number of games to be performed increases is executed. However, if it is known in advance that the specific termination condition for the advantageous state is satisfied, further specific determination is meaningless. In this case, avoiding the specific determination can be advantageous for the player, for example, the game can be used for other games.

Feature J17. The gaming machine according to characteristic J16, wherein in the specific state, an execution mode or execution frequency of the operation notification by the operation notification means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, since the mode or frequency of execution of the operation notification is restricted in the specific state, it is possible to specify that the operation notification is not performed in a situation where it is meaningless to receive the specific determination. The state should be terminated as soon as possible. By doing so, the significance of avoiding the specific determination in the second specific situation becomes clearer.

Feature J18. Avoidance information grasping means for grasping avoidance information indicating that execution of the specific determination is avoided in the second game (function for executing processing for grasping the avoidance counter by the main control device 101);
When the specific event means causes the specific event, a specific means (for the first specialized zone by the main controller 101) capable of reflecting the avoidance information grasped by the avoidance information grasping means in the specific event. A function of executing a process of adding the value of the avoidance counter to the number of additional games and the number of set stocks at the time of extra winnings or set stock winnings in the processing and the processing for the second specialized zone);
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J17, characterized by comprising:

According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as affecting a specific event that occurs later by avoiding the specific determination. For example, if avoidance makes the subsequent specific event advantageous, avoiding the specific judgment will have merit, and conversely, if avoidance makes the subsequent specific event unfavorable , the player can determine whether or not to evade in consideration of the degree of avoidance. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature J19. The specifying means is configured such that the avoidance information ascertained by the avoidance information ascertaining means is a second number that is greater than the first number, as compared with the case where the avoidance information is information corresponding to the number of avoidances being the first number. is a configuration that can make the specific event more advantageous when it is information corresponding to
Means capable of initializing the avoidance information ascertained by the avoidance information grasping means when the specific judgment is made by the specific judgment means (processing for initializing the avoidance counter by main controller 101) function to execute).

According to the above configuration, the more the specific judgment is avoided, the more advantageous the subsequent specific event is, but the avoidance information is initialized when the specific judgment is made, so if the specific judgment is not won. If this happens, the evasion information of what has been evaded until then will be spoiled. Therefore, the selection of whether or not to receive the specific determination is made more carefully, and the game performance using the first game and the second game is improved.

Feature J20. A game starting means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101);
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the player's ending operation;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) capable of executing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player when the start operation is performed;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result, a privilege granting means (payout determination by the main controller 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result function to perform processing) and
A gaming machine comprising
Updating means for updating predetermined predetermined information (AT random number, number of games in advantageous section AG, symbol numbers of reaching symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) (random number acquisition processing by main controller 101, advantageous section game number update processing, reel control processing function),
Specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event advantageous to the player (transition to AT mode, addition, set stock) by using the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the predetermined information. (a function of executing AT lottery processing, AT addition processing, first specialized zone processing, and second specialized zone processing by main controller 101);
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (causes the transition to the AT mode by the main controller 101) processing, processing to add the number of games, processing to perform set stock) and
with
A first operation game (bet game with a specific prescribed number, a specific operation mode when winning normal replies A to C) that at least causes the specific event to occur or makes the specific event likely to occur, and prevents the specific event from occurring Or a second operation game that makes the specific event less likely to occur than when the first operation game is performed (betting games other than the specific prescribed number, operations other than the specific operation mode when winning normal replies A to C) and are set,
At least in a specific state (first specialized zone), a first specific situation (a situation in which an excess flag is not set) in which execution of the first operation game is more advantageous for the player than execution of the second operation game )When,
a second specific situation (situation in which an excess flag is set) in which execution of the second operation game is more advantageous to the player than execution of the first operation game in the specific state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to exist.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery for the game is performed, the game is ended based on the end operation, and the end operation is an operation corresponding to the lottery result. In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine, in which a privilege is given if a player wins, a specific determination is made as to whether or not to cause a specific event that is advantageous to the player by using the game lottery result and predetermined information. If the specific determination is won, a specific event will occur. Therefore, interest in the determination result of the specific determination as well as the lottery results of each game can be enhanced. In addition, since the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the predetermined information are used to determine whether or not to cause the specific event, each game simply associates the result of the lottery by the lottery means with the end operation. Completely different from the conventional slot machine, novel gameplay is realized using the relationship between the predetermined information and the lottery result of each game.

In addition, in this gaming machine, a first operation game that causes a specific event to occur or is likely to occur, and a second operation game that prevents or makes it difficult for the specific event to occur are provided. Since the first specific situation in which the first operation game is more advantageous, and the second specific situation in which the second operation game is more advantageous in the specific state are set. In addition to the gameplay that only causes specific events that are advantageous to the player, the game that prevents the occurrence of specific events is also added, and it is possible to switch between them by the player's operation. It is possible to provide a game machine with Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that each configuration of the features J1 to J19 may be applied individually to the feature J20, or may be applied in combination with each other. may be applied to, or the partial configurations may be applied in combination with each other.

The inventions described in the features J1 to J20 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J20, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. a first specific state (AT mode) advantageous to the player;
a second specific state (first specialized zone) in which the transition to the first specific state is likely to occur or the number of games in the first specific state is likely to be increased;
is set and
By performing the first game (advantageous game) in which the number of games played in the second specific state increases, the proportion of the first specific state in a predetermined period increases,
By playing a second game (normal game) in which the number of games in the second specific state is less than in the first game, the proportion of the first specific state in a predetermined period is set to increase. cage,
A gaming machine comprising selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) that allows a player to select between the first game and the second game.

The first specific state is an advantageous state for the player, and the second specific state that tends to shift to the first specific state or increase the number of games played in the first specific state functions as a so-called chance zone or specialized zone. It is in a state of having In the above configuration, in addition to the general configuration of the first game that makes it possible to increase the ratio of the first specific state by increasing the number of games in the second specific state as much as possible, the second specific state It has a second game that makes it possible to increase the ratio of the first specific state even by reducing the number of games, and furthermore, the first game is played to increase the ratio of the first specific state, Since the player can select whether to play the second game and increase the ratio of the first specific state, the player can fully enjoy the second specific state according to the situation while playing the first specific state. , or early termination of the second specific state to secure the profit of the first specific state early.

Feature K2. a first specific situation (situation in which the excess flag is not set) in which playing the first game is more advantageous for the player than playing the second game;
a second specific situation (situation in which an excess flag is set) in which playing the second game is more advantageous for the player than playing the first game;
The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that it is set to exist.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the second specific state should be continued for a long time is exactly the opposite depending on which specific situation it is. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability in the second specific state by having the player positively judge the specific situation.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein in the second specific situation, even if the first game is played, the ratio of the first specific state in the predetermined period cannot be increased.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature K2. With such a configuration, there is no point in playing the first game in the second specific situation, and the advantage of playing the second game can be emphasized.

Feature K4. An advantageous state (advantageous interval) including the first specific state and the second specific state is set,
Advantageous ending means ( a function of executing processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous section by the main controller 101;
an end comprehension means (function for executing remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing by the main control device 101) capable of ascertaining that the specific end condition is satisfied before the specific end condition is satisfied;
with
the first specific situation is a situation in which the completion grasping means does not grasp that the specific end condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3, wherein the second specific situation is a situation in which it is grasped by the end grasping means that the specific end condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, in the first specific situation where it is not known in advance that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous state is reached, the transition to the first specific state is made until the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is reached as much as possible. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of games in the first specific state or to increase the number of games in the first specific state that is in transition. On the other hand, in the second specific situation in which it is known in advance that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number will be reached, it is advantageous for the player to complete the first specific state rather than the second specific state as much as possible. . Therefore, although it is assumed that normally increasing the number of games in the first specific state directly leads to profits for the player, in the second specific situation, the number of games in the second specific state is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property such that the ratio of the first specific state is increased, and the benefit of the first specific state is enjoyed by the amount of the reduced number of games in the second specific state.

Feature K5. The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the predetermined period is a period until the advantageous state ends.

In the first specific situation in which it is not grasped that the specific end condition is satisfied, it is still confirmed that the advantageous state including the first specific state and the second specific state reaches the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number. It can be said that there is a vacancy before the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. Therefore, if the second specific state is completed in the first game, by increasing the number of games in the first specific state, the upper limit number of games or the upper limit is increased by the increase in the number of games in the first specific state. The first specific state occupies a larger proportion of the number. On the other hand, in the second specific situation where it is recognized that the specific end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state including the first specific state and the second specific state reaches the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. is fixed, and there is no vacancy up to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. Therefore, by completing the second specific state in the second game, the proportion of the first specific state increases by the amount of the decrease in the number of games in the second specific state.

Feature K6. The first specific state transitions through the second specific state, and when a predetermined termination condition in the first specific state is satisfied, the state transitions to the second specific state. The game machine according to any one of K1 to K5.

According to the above configuration, the state transitions to the first specific state through the second specific state, and when the first specific state ends, the state shifts to the second specific state. Therefore, the first specific state and the second specific state are alternately repeated. This is the configuration that will be executed. That is, in order to digest the first specific state, it is essential to digest the second specific state. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the ratio of the first specific state by adjusting the number of games played in the second specific state.

Feature K7. The second specific state is configured to end by playing at least a specific number of games,
By playing the first game, the number of games in the second specific state becomes greater than the specific number,
By playing the second game, the number of games played in the second specific state becomes the specific number, or is smaller than when the first game is played and is equal to or greater than the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K6.

As in the above configuration, in order to complete the second specific state, at least a specific number or more of games are required, so that the ratio of the first specific state without playing the second specific state at all It is made clearer that it is not a configuration that increases .

Feature K8. game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value imparting means (payout device 53) for imparting a game value according to game content;
with
In the second specific state, the expected increase/decrease number (net increase number) which is the average value per game of the values obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value given by the game value giving means is set to be negative, the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7.

According to the above configuration, the greater the number of games played in the second specific state, the more game value is required, and the smaller the number of games played in the second specific state, the less game value is lost. With such a configuration, there is not only the advantage that the first game that increases the number of games in the second specific state increases the proportion of the first specific state, but also the disadvantage that a large amount of game value is required. The second game that reduces the number of games in the second specific state not only has the advantage of increasing the ratio of the first specific state, but also allows the second specific state to be consumed with a relatively small game value. There is also an advantage to become. Therefore, the required amount of these game values also becomes a parameter for selecting whether the first game or the second game should be performed, and the interest in selecting which game to perform increases.

Feature K9. A specific determination means (a function of executing an additional lottery or a set stock lottery by the main control unit 101) capable of executing a specific determination of shifting to the first specific state or increasing the number of games in the first specific state prepared,
The second specific state is a state in which the specific determination is made by the specific determination means,
Any of the characteristics K1 to K8, characterized in that the number of executions of the specific determination in the second specific state is set to be the same number regardless of whether the first game or the second game is performed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the number of executions of the specific determination between the first game and the second game, and only the number of games in the second specific state changes. By doing so, there is no need to complicately change the configuration of the second specific state itself depending on which game is played, and the playability of each game in the second specific state is set with a relatively simple configuration. It becomes possible to

Feature K10. By performing the first game, the probability that the result of the specific determination is the result corresponding to shifting to the first specific state or increasing the number of games in the first specific state is the second game The game machine according to feature K9, characterized in that it tends to become higher than it does.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of executions of the specific determination is the same, the winning probability of the specific determination increases when the first game in which the number of games in the second specific state increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to bring about the advantage of performing the first game in a configuration in which the number of executions of the specific determination is the same regardless of which game is played.

In addition, the invention described in the features K1 to K10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features K1 to K10, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Updating means for updating predetermined information (AT random number, advantageous interval game number AG) according to game progress )When,
Acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information updated by the update means (function for executing random number acquisition processing by the main controller 101 and processing for grasping the number of games in the advantageous section AG);
Using at least the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, a specific determination means (additional lottery or set stock lottery by the main controller 101) that executes a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event that is advantageous to the player function) and
If the lottery result by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (a process of adding the number of additional games to the AT game counter by the main controller 101) and the function to execute the process of adding the set stock number to the set counter),
selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) with which the player can select whether to permit or avoid execution of the specific determination;
with
The updating means is configured to update the predetermined information even when the selecting means selects to avoid execution of the specific determination,
As the predetermined information, specific information is set that makes the result of the specific determination more likely to be the specific result than other predetermined information,
The acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information is the profit received by the player due to the specific determination using the specific information becoming the specific result (medals when the AT mode for the number of additional games is completed) The player's loss caused by avoiding the execution of the specific determination using the other predetermined information until the specific information is obtained by the obtaining means (when playing an advantageous game A gaming machine characterized in that it is set so that the resulting medal loss) is smaller.

According to the above configuration, the player can select whether to accept or avoid the specific determination using the predetermined information updated by the updating means according to the progress of the game. Even if execution of determination is avoided, the predetermined information is updated. Therefore, a game is realized in which the specific judgment is avoided until the prescribed information desired by the player is updated to specific information that is likely to result in a specific result winning in the specific judgment, and the specific judgment is received when the specific information is updated. can do. In this case, the profit that the player can receive by winning the specific result in the specific judgment using the specific information is the profit that the player can receive from the other than the specific information until the specific information is obtained. Since this is greater than the player's loss due to avoiding the specific determination using the predetermined information, there is an advantage in avoiding the specific determination using the other predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to favorably perform the game described above.

In addition, in the case of providing "game value setting means for setting a game value for playing a game" and "privilege granting means for granting a privilege according to the content of the game", "profits received by the player", The "profit loss of the player" can be expressed as, for example, "the difference between the game value set by the game value setting means and the privilege given by the privilege giving means".

Feature L2. The acquisition rate at which the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means is higher when the execution of the specific determination is avoided in accordance with the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that the gaming machine is set so that the player can obtain a larger profit than when the execution of the specific determination is permitted regardless of the information.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of avoiding the specific determination according to the predetermined information is made clearer. Therefore, it becomes easier to enjoy the game in which the specific determination is avoided.

Feature L3. A first specific state (first specialized zone) in which the result of the specific determination is likely to be the specific result, and a second specific state (AT mode) in which the result of the specific determination is less likely to be the specific result than in the specific state, is set and
The acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information in the first specific state is higher than the profit received by the player due to the specific determination using the specific information becoming the specific result. While the player's loss caused by avoiding execution of the specific determination using the other predetermined information until the specific information is acquired is set to be smaller, in the second specific state The acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information is that the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means rather than the profit received by the player due to the specific determination using the specific information becoming the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, characterized in that the player's loss caused by avoiding execution of the specific determination using the other predetermined information is set to be greater until the .

According to the above configuration, a game that avoids the specific determination until the specific information is acquired is established in the first specific state, and is less likely to be established in the second specific state. In other words, if a game is played in which the specific determination is avoided in the zone 2 specific state, the loss for the player increases. By doing so, it is possible to make the game progress more smoothly, and it is possible to ensure the rarity of the game that avoids the specific judgment, and to preferably increase the attention to the game. .

Feature L4. game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value imparting means (payout device 53) for imparting a game value according to game content;
with
1 of the difference obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value given by the game value giving means when a game is played to avoid execution of the specific determination in the first specific state; The gaming machine according to feature L3, wherein the expected increase/decrease number (net increase number), which is the average value per game, is set to be negative.

According to the above configuration, when a game is played in which execution of the specific determination is avoided, the game value becomes negative in the first specific state. By doing so, although it is easy to win the specific determination in the first specific state, the game value becomes negative by playing a game that avoids the specific determination. Limits may arise, such as whether the value can be negative. In this way, it is possible to perform a game while avoiding a specific judgment by throwing a game value, while considering whether the game value corresponding to the game value can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game. planned.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the expected increase/decrease number (net increase number) is set to be negative when a game allowing execution of the specific determination is performed in the first specific state. .

According to the above configuration, in the first specific state, the game value is set to be negative regardless of whether execution of the specific determination is avoided or permitted. By doing so, not only the game until the specific information is acquired, but also the game when the specific information is acquired has a negative game value, and the first specific state continues endlessly. A lot of game values are required to repeat the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the determination of whether or not to allow the execution of the specific determination more strictly in consideration of the game value to be thrown, and to increase the interest of the game through the determination.

Feature L6. The expected increase/decrease in the case of playing a game that avoids the execution of the specific determination in the first specific state is higher than the expected increase/decrease in the case of playing the game that allows the execution of the specific determination in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature L4 or feature L5, wherein the number is set to be larger.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game that avoids the specific determination in the first specific state, the decrease in the game value is mitigated compared to the game that allows the execution of the specific determination. By adopting such a configuration, the compensation for avoiding the specific determination in the first specific state is relatively small, and it is possible to make the avoidance game more suitable.

Feature L7. game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value imparting means (payout device 53) for imparting a game value according to game content;
with
1 of the difference obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value given by the game value giving means when a game allowing the execution of the specific determination is performed in the second specific state; The gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L6, wherein the expected increase/decrease number, which is the average value per game, is set to be positive.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, the game value becomes positive when a game that allows the execution of the specific determination is performed, and there is an advantage in proceeding with the game that allows the execution of the specific determination. Become. With such a configuration, in the second specific state, the advantage of avoiding the specific determination is relatively small, and it is possible to motivate the player not to play the avoidance game.

Feature L8. a game number means for counting the number of games that can be executed in the first specific state (function for executing a process of counting the first specialized zone counter by the main control device 101);
Specific end means for ending the first specific state when the number of games counted by the number-of-games means reaches a specific number (function for executing processing for ending the first specialized zone by the main control device 101) When,
with
The game number means counts the number of games in the first specific state when the selecting means selects to allow execution of the specific determination, and the selecting means allows the specific determination to be performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L7, wherein the number of games played in the first specific state is not counted when the restriction is selected.

According to the above configuration, since the number of executions of the specific determination is limited in the first specific state, it is more meaningful to avoid the specific determination.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific determination using the other predetermined information may result in the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means is not the specific information but other predetermined information, and the specific determination may be won even if the selection means does not avoid the execution of the specific determination. is set to With such a configuration, it is possible to challenge the specific judgment with expectation to some extent, even if it is not necessarily avoided until the specific information is acquired, and a game that avoids such a specific judgment balance can be maintained.

Feature L10. In a situation where a predetermined specific condition is not satisfied (an excess flag is not set), and the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means is not the specific information, the selection means executes the specific determination. While the player receives a greater benefit when the selection to avoid execution of the specific determination is made than when the selection is made to allow
In a situation where the specific condition is satisfied (an excess flag is set), the specific determination is made by the selection means regardless of whether the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means is the specific information. Any one of features L1 to L9, characterized in that the player receives a greater profit when the player makes a selection to allow execution of the specific determination than when a selection is made to avoid the execution of game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that avoiding the execution of the specific determination until the specific information is acquired is advantageous in order to efficiently cause the specific event that is advantageous to the player, but the specific condition is not satisfied. If it is established, regardless of whether or not the acquired predetermined information is the specific information, the player will receive a greater profit if the execution of the specific determination is permitted. By doing so, the success or failure of the specific condition is added as a parameter to the playability of selecting whether or not to avoid the execution of the specific determination simply based on whether or not it is the specific information, and the execution of the specific determination is avoided. The amusement of the selection game as to whether or not to play is greatly improved.

Feature L11. Grasping means (main controller 101) capable of grasping that the profit received by the player reaches a predetermined upper limit due to the specific determination using the specific information becoming the specific result before reaching the upper limit function to execute remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing by
The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the grasping means grasps that the upper limit is reached.

If it is known in advance that a specific event has occurred as a result of a specific judgment using specific information, and the profit received by the player has already reached the upper limit, no further specific information will be used. There is no advantage in avoiding execution of a specific determination until it is acquired. Therefore, in situations such as the above configuration, it is better to allow the execution of the specific judgment without avoiding the execution of the specific judgment. By using a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to make the selection game of whether to avoid or not to be heavy.

Feature L12. Specific notification means capable of executing specific notification of the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means (each specific notification by the display control device 81) before the execution or avoidance of the specific determination is selected The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L11, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the player can select whether or not to avoid execution of the specific determination after grasping the predetermined information by the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics such as avoiding the specific determination.

In addition, the invention described in the above features L1 to L12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features L1 to L12, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, and features M1 to M9 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. updating means for updating predetermined information (random number acquisition processing and random number shift processing by main control unit 101, function for executing advantageous interval game number AG addition processing);
Using at least the predetermined information, a specific determination means (additional lottery or set stock lottery by the main controller 101) that performs a specific determination to cause a specific event (additional number of games, set stock) that is advantageous to the player. function) and
Specific notification means (function for executing processing for performing each specific notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification about the predetermined information used for the specific determination;
selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for enabling selection between a first game that permits execution of the specific determination and a second game that avoids execution of the specific determination;
with
The specific determination by the specific determination means uses the first specific information (AT random number in the first numerical range, the last digit of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1, 3, 5, 7) among the predetermined information. In the case, the second specific information among the predetermined information (AT random numbers in the second and third numerical bands, the last digit of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9 ) is more likely to result in a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event,
The specific notification means is capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information and executing a second specific notification corresponding to the second specific information as the specific notification, and When a predetermined specific condition is established and the predetermined information used for the specific determination is the second specific information, a specific means (display control device 81 A function of executing a process for performing a first specific notification when an excess flag is set and it is an AT random number in the second numerical band or the third numerical band). .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration for performing the specific determination of the occurrence of a specific event advantageous to the player using the predetermined information, the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined information may be performed. Since the player can select the first game that allows the execution of and the second game that restricts the execution of the specific determination, the second specific information that makes it difficult to win the specific determination based on the specific notification is used, the execution of the specific judgment is avoided, and the specific judgment is received only when the first specific information that is likely to win the specific judgment is used. can be realized. Moreover, when the second specific information is used based on the establishment of the specific condition, the first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information may be performed. Seeing the success or failure of the conditions is the key to increasing the winning rate of a specific judgment. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more interesting by predicting whether or not the player will receive the specific determination from the specific notification while foreseeing the success or failure of the specific condition.

Feature M2. In the situation where the specific condition is established, the execution of the specific determination using the second specific information is allowed in the first game, and the execution of the specific decision using the second specific information is permitted. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the situation is advantageous to the player rather than avoiding it in the second game.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the specific determination is the second specific information that is unlikely to result in a specific result, the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where it is more advantageous for the player to execute the specific determination as it is, and the second specific information is used. Even if there is, the first specific notification is performed. By doing so, even if the specific determination is not won, the player is ultimately advantageous, and the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

Feature M3. At least in the specific state (first specialized zone) where the specific notification is performed, the number of executions of the specific determination is the same regardless of whether the first game or the second game is performed. The game machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, wherein

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific determination can be avoided in the second game without reducing the number of executions of the specific determination. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select between the first game and the second game with peace of mind.

Feature M4. The above-mentioned specific condition is established in a situation where the occurrence of the above-mentioned specific event is not advantageous for the player or in a situation where it is less advantageous than when the above-mentioned specific condition is not established (situation where the excess flag is set). The game machine according to feature M3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, even if the first specific information that is unlikely to win the specific determination is provided for the specific determination, if the situation does not or is unlikely to be advantageous to the player even if the specific event occurs, the player can Disadvantages are unlikely. Therefore, in such a case, if the first specific notification is performed even if the second specific information is used, the specific determination is not wastefully avoided, and the game can be played smoothly.

Feature M5. game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value imparting means (payout device 53) for imparting a game value according to game content;
with
At least in the specific state (first specialized zone) where the specific notification is performed, the value obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value given by the game value giving means per game The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, wherein the expected increase/decrease number, which is an average value, is set to be negative.

According to the above configuration, the game value possessed by the player is reduced by completing the specific state, and the number of executions of the specific determination is set to be the same regardless of whether or not the specific determination is avoided. In such a configuration, avoiding a specific determination is also a factor in increasing the loss of game value. Such a configuration encourages the player to seriously consider whether or not to avoid the specific determination, and makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game in which the player selects whether or not to avoid.

Feature M6. The expected increase/decrease number when the first game is played in the specific state is set to be smaller than the expected increase/decrease number when the second game is played in the specific state. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature M5.

According to the above configuration, although the game value is lost by avoiding the specific determination, the loss can be kept smaller than the game value loss when receiving the specific determination. Therefore, it is possible to set the risk of avoiding the specific determination within a range that does not spoil the interest of the game of predicting the type of predetermined information provided for the specific determination in relation to the specific notification.

Feature M7. A second specifying means (by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first specified notification when the predetermined information used for the specified determination is the second specified information in a situation where the specified condition is not satisfied A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, characterized by comprising a function of executing a pseudo notification lottery process.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, the first specific notification can be performed even with the second specific information, making it difficult to see whether the specific condition is satisfied or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in seeing whether the specific condition is successful or not.

It should be noted that, in the feature M7, it is preferable to replace the "specifying means" in the feature M1 with the "first specifying means" and apply it.

Feature M8. The specifying means, in a situation where the specified condition is satisfied, the specified information used for the specified determination is the second specified information, and the first specified information is selected when a predetermined first lottery is won. It is a configuration for executing notification,
The second specifying means, when the specified information used for the specified determination is the second specified information in a situation where the specified condition is not satisfied, and when a predetermined second lottery is won, the second specified information is selected. 1 is a configuration for executing specific notification,
The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein the winning probability of the first lottery is set to be higher than the winning probability of the second lottery.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, the probability that the first specific notification is performed in spite of the second specific information is higher than when the specific condition is not satisfied. In other words, in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, the possibility of the first specific notification being performed in the case of the second specific information is relatively low, and the reliability of the first specific notification is ensured. In other words, by assuming that the reliability of the first specific notification is high, when the first specific notification is performed in a situation where the specific condition is established, the effect of causing the player to play the first game is achieved. can be expected.

Feature M9. The game according to any one of features M1 to M8, wherein the specific notification means executes the specific notification at least before the first game and the second game can be selected. machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can make good use of the specific notification in determining which game to play.

The inventions described in the features M1 to M9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features M1 to M9, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L12 individually. It is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas of When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group I to each configuration of feature group A to feature group I detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a means capable of updating predetermined information;
means capable of executing a specific determination that enables a specific event that is advantageous to the player to occur, using at least the specific information corresponding to the predetermined information;
means capable of executing specific notification of the specific information used for the specific determination;
with
A first game that allows the specific determination to be performed and a second game that allows the specific determination not to be performed are executable,
The specific determination corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event when using the first specific information of the specific information than when using the second specific information of the specific information. The identification result is likely to be obtained, or the identification result is obtained when the first identification information is used, but the identification result is not obtained when the second identification information is used,
means capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information as the specific notification;
means capable of executing a second specific notification corresponding to the second specific information as the specific notification;
means for executing the first specific notification as the specific notification in a predetermined case even if the specific information used for the specific determination is the second specific information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images